Home

Singer 236W Sewing Machine User Manual

1. 0 5 12 6 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords 12 7 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side and DTE Side Passwords 4 1 Result Codes siseses ees eaaa Bs Bian oR Sow Bt Sed Rte oe Rhee Ree a 14 2 391x Series AT Commands 0 0 eee ceed 14 3 391x Series S REPisters 4 6 cco ds cee Dawe e eee ene ba ee eee ees Re EE B l Modem Healt cs o ag ses cn ele atl Sadie he ueG bean REEE ER hee B 2 Leased Line Operation 0 0 cee cee eee B 3 Dial Backup Operation 0 0 c cee ence ee B 4 Modem DTE Connection 00 eee eee B 5 Modem VF Connection 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee B 6 Online Op rati n seses ee a eee Se ee ed C 1 EIA 232 D Pin Assignments 0 0 0 eee tees C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments 0 0 00 cee eee ee eee 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 vii COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table D 1 V 25bis Commands 0 eee eee eee eee ee eees D 2 V 25bis Response Messages 2 0 0c cece eee eee eee nee E F ASCIPE Characters 20 6665 4ce id soe fale ee waste e E Vale ded wats Gwin we dad Pod F 1 Factory Default Configuration Options viii September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions How to Use This manual describes how to install and operate the COMSPHERE 391x Series standalone and carrier mounted modems This manual assumes that you have
2. 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 33 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 5 2 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options LeasedLine Rate 19200 V32t Nxt 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp 2400 V22bis 14400 V33 12000 V33 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis Leased Line Rate Determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset m 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32bis or V 32terbo modulation at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines m 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint mode at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 4 wire leased lines The 19200 TMp modulation does not appear on tributary modems NOTE TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems For example one inbound link may be configured for 14 4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for 9 6 kbps The following control trioutary rate combinations are allowed control at 19 2 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 14
3. synchronous operation Talk Data branch 3 8J 11 1 telephone external 11 1 C 4 technical specifications 1 84 1 10 telephone external 11 1 C 4 telephone numbers display 10 2 storage test Abort 8 2 8 10 Diagnostic Connection 5 51 DTE Local Loopback DTE Remote Loopback Local Analog Loopback 8 44 8 10 Local Digital Loopback 8 68 10 Pattern 8 748 10 Receive Remote Loopback Response Remote Digital Loopback 8 54 8 10 self test 18 10 Timeout 5 47 ddress 5 47 V 54 Device Type 5 47 Index 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Index Test branch 8 14 8 2 in menu structure 3 8 Test configuration options group 5 46455 47 TMP default configurations See default configuration options TMp Train Time TMp Transmit Preemphasis top level menu messages 3 83 14 train time transmit level dial line Trellis Multipoint TMp 3 9 3 10 B 14 4 1 tributary modems identifying 5 50 maximum number 6 1 mixed firmware Troubleshooting B 1 B 6 EAE United States government requirements 1 5 1 6 UNIX dial 2 65 1 5 10 Upstream Port V 22bis Guard Time dial line 5 32 V 25bis coding 5 24 dialing commands and res ponses D 14 D 7 New Line Character V 27bis Train Time 5 37 V 29 Link Confi guration 5 37 Retrain 5 37 Train On Data 5 37 V 32bis Automode dial line Aut
4. 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 iii COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Appendices Ac Menu Tree segnr itori Ee o eE ENa E aduiese S B Troubleshooting 0 0 ee eee C Pin Assignments 6 26 cv aces ee eee eee ee eee ees D CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response E ASCII Character Table 0 0 00 00 0 eee eee F Default Configuration Options 00 G Sample Configurations 0 0 cece eee eee H Equipment List 0 eee cee eee Glossary Index iv September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Model 3910 cs cnc c aceon ee hee e bao teh a tea eae Yash Gael ee E2 Model 3911 2025654 ire blac T oor det edge aca E es Lets 2 1 Model 3910 Rear Panel and Power Supply 00 0 0 00200 ee 2 2 Installing a Model 3911 Modem 02 0 cece eee 2 3 gt Circuit Pack Lock piavahiiaeneesahi eh bows eo ches Geaeaea Pac E e sda 3 1 Model 3910 DEP wo i sabes caedhas Vhe eke oe hee a eee R eo Le eae bee 3 2 Optional SDCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Optional SDU 3 3 391x Series LCD and Keypad 0 0 0 eee eee eee 5 1 DCP Configuration Process 0 0 eee eee 5 2 AT Command Configuration Process 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 8 1 Local Analog Loopback 0 0 0 0 cece eens 8 2 Remote Digital Loopback 0 0 0 eee rreren rr errr 8 3 Local Digital Loo
5. 5 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 1 4 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options DSR Control Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows _DTR On_Early Delay_ToData Data Set Ready Control DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for operation m Standard RS232 Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE The modem raises DSR when it begins the handshake process DSR lowers upon disconnect The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR CTS and LSD are active An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data An OFF state indicates that the modem is not ready to receive data and the DTE will not send data to the modem During a Local Analog Loop and a Remote Digital Loop DSR is ON Forced On Forces DSR output ON constantly This is usually used for leased line applications and when the DTE requires DSR to always be ON Wink When Disconnect DSR is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR When the modem receives DTR from the DTE it sends DSR to the DTE On Early DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data mode This setting is required for some modem pooling applications m Delay to Data Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters Data mode N
6. A problem is suspected after the power up self test Perform a self test via the modem s DCP or type AT amp T9 if using AT commands Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test If the modem consistently registers errors contact your service representative If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists then the problem is probably not with your modem 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 B 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table B 2 Leased Line Operation Symptom Action The modems do not train up on Verify that the correct cabling is used for your application Refer to leased lines Chapter 2 Modem Installation Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is configured for Originate mode For TMp operation one modem must be configured as a control modem and the other as a tributary modem Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme Verify that both modems are configured for the appropriate leased line mode For example if you have a 4 wire leased line then the modems must be configured for 4 wire operation Table B 3 Dial Backup Operation Symptom Action The dial backup line is present Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is but the modems cannot connect stored in directory location 1 Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option set to Enable Refer to Lease
7. DTE_ Dialer W Line_Dialer E Dial_Line E Leased_Line W Async Sync Mode DTE Dialer Type AutoAnswerRing Dial Line Rate Leased Mode Async DTE Rate AT Escape Char Dialer Type V32bis Automode LeasedLine Rate Asyn Data Bits Escape GuardTim DialTone Detect V32bis Autorate V32bis Autorate Asyn Parity Bit BreakForceEscap Blind Dial Paus V32bis_Override V32bis Override Asyn Stop Bits CommandCharEcho BusyTone Detect Dial TX Level Leased TX Level DTR Action CarriageRtn Char Pause Time V22b Guard Tone Auto Dial Back DSR Control Backspace Char NoAnswer Timout V32bis Train AutoDialStandby RTS Action Linefeed Char Fast Disconnect SpecialStandby RTS Antistream Result Codes Line Crnt Disc DialStandby Time CTS Control ExtendResltCode Long Space Disc CarrierOn Level RTS CTS Delay ResultCode Form No Carrier Disc V27bis Train LSD Control AT Cmnd Mode No Data Disc V29 TrainOnData TX Clock Source V25bis Coding Auto Make Busy V29 Retrain Bakup_TXClk_Src V25bis IdleFill MakeBusyVia DTR V29 Link Config XTXC Clamps TXC V25b NewLineChr TMp Train Time CT111_Rate Cntl TMp TxPremphasis DTE_Rate VF Lease_Lookback Extend Main Ch Dual_Leased_Ln Upstream Port BackupLineCheck DTE amp VF Alarms 98 16129a A 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Menu Tree from previous page lt Choose Address TMP Control only Choose Password TMP only Not in TMp Trib Prim data blckd Secondary ExitRem appears instead of Re
8. E 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ASCII Character Table Table E 1 3 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 3D 061 3E 062 gt 3F 063 40 064 41 065 A 42 066 B 43 067 C 44 068 D 45 069 E 46 070 F 47 071 G 48 072 H 49 073 4A 074 J 4B 075 K 4C 076 L 4D 077 M 4E 078 N 4F 079 50 080 P 51 081 Q 52 082 R 53 083 S 54 084 T 55 085 U 56 086 V 57 087 W 58 088 xX 59 089 Y 5A 090 Z 5B 091 5C 092 5D 093 5E 094 A 5F 095 60 096 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 E 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table E 1 4 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 61 097 a 62 098 b 63 099 c 64 100 d 65 101 e 66 102 f 67 103 g 68 104 h 69 105 i 6A 106 j 6B 107 k 6C 108 l 6D 109 m 6E 110 n 6F 111 O 70 112 p 71 113 q 72 114 r 73 115 s 74 116 t 75 117 u 76 118 v 77 119 w 78 120 X 79 121 y 7A 122 z 7B 123 7C 124 7D 125 7E 126 7F 127 delete E 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Default Configuration Options Overview Table F 1 lists all default configuration options for the factory preset configurations An N A
9. Figure G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management Configuration Options 3910 A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied E A 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 4 Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 G 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Carrier with Network Management Figure G 5 shows a sample configuration for COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier applications with network management 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX _ 5 TX DTE sat Leased ore DTE Sync iF Sync Cable 1 leh Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 ard cc IN COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier NMS Cable 4 6700 or 6800 E Adapter 002 0025 0031 Figure G 5 Sample Configuration Carrier with Network Management Configuration Option
10. Press the A key to scroll up to the Edit Save screen VF Thresholds A E Save I A w l Seo Select Save If the edited VF thresholds are valid the Save command stores them into nonvolatile memory When the Save completes the message Save Completed appears Save VF Thresh A Thd Out of Range A lej e le If the edited VF threshold is invalid out of range the error message Thd Out of Range appears This indicates the Save procedure was unsuccessful Return to the Edit screen and correct the invalid threshold range 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To correct the invalid VF threshold press the A key to return to the VF Threshold Edit Save Reset screen Zz VF Thresholds Save PN A trjJlel W Select Reset to restore the original default values into memory Repeat the Edit and Save procedure until the VF threshold s is valid and the Save completes successfully Save Completed To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key Table 7 1 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds VF Thresholds Valid Ranges Default Values Receive Signal Level High 0 dBm to 15 dBm Above 9 dBm Receive Signal Level Low 16 dBm to 50 dBm Below 23 dBm Signal to Noise Ratio 5 dB to 40 dB Below 23 dB Non Linear Distortion 15 dB to 50 dB
11. Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device Sometimes referred to as straps Top Level menu branch that contains all the device s configuration options An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection Glossary 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Glossary constant carrier mode Control Channel CC control modem controlled carrier mode Customer 1 Customer 2 data carrier data compression Data mode dBm DCE DCP demodulation DevHS Diagnostic Channel DC dial backup dial command modifiers dial line dial network Dial Standby dial string digital signal directory location DOC The modem transmits a carrier signal constantly regardless of RTS The diagnostic interface between a network management system and a network device It polls downstream tributary modems across the analog channel The mode in which the modem s transmitter turns on and off in response to RTS This mode is used by multipoint tributary modems A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains information to be transmitted The elimination of empty fields r
12. COMSPHERE 3900 SERIES MODEMS MODELS 3910 AND 3911 POINT TO POINT MULTIPOINT INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL Document No 3910 A2 GN32 41 February 2002 Digicomm RurstraBe 4 D 41564 Kaarst 1 Telefon 02131 6 69 08 0 Telefax 02131 66 71 48 Internet www digicomm de e mail info digicomm de COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Models 3910 and 3911 Point to Point Multipoint Installation and Operation Manual 3910 A2 GN32 41 6th Edition February 2002 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual For the 3900 Series standalone modems the Universal Service Order Code USOC for Permissive mode is RJ11C The Canadian equivalent to RJ11C is CAI1A For 3900 Series carrier mounted modems the USOC for Permissive mode is RJ21X The Canadian equivalent to RJ21X is CA21A FCC Registration number See label on modem Ringer Equivalence number REN See label on modem Model 3910 Canadian Certification number See label on modem Canadian DOC Load number See label on modem Model 3911 Canadian Certification number See label on modem Canadian DOC Load number See label on modem Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use on
13. Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 6 Sample Configuration Extended Multipoint 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 G 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Configuration Options Cables 3920 A 3920 B 3910 A 3910 B 3910 C Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate at 19 2K Set ports 1 2 3 and 4 to 4800 Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC_Loop Rate at 19 2K Set ports 1 2 3 and 4 to 4800 Port TXC Source Set port 4 to External Use TMp Control default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC_Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC_Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use a standard customer supplied E A 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EJA 232 D V 24 cross
14. NOTE Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and in Sweden The AT command for Tone is T The AT command for Pulse is P DialTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Dial Tone Detect Sets the modem for dial tone detection enable or blind dialing disable Enable Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal m Disable Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line This is known as blind dialing The period of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Pause configuration option NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries The AT commands for Disable are X0 X1 and X3 The AT commands for Enable are X2 X4 X5 X6 and X7 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 25 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 3 2 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options Blind Dial Pause 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is configured for Disable Blind Dial Pause Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is disabled NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S6 n where nis from 2 to 255 in 1 second increments Busy Tone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Busy Tone Det
15. 1 of 2 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Major Device Failure A device self test has failed The probable cause is a modem hardware problem or diagnostic memory failure Facility Fault A severe data transport problem is occurring due to poor line conditions No signal or a very poor signal is being received Streaming DTE The modem is in an Antistreaming condition The RTS input to the modem was held ON for a period exceeding the time selected by the RTS Antistream configuration option Refer to DTE Interface in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for a description of the RTS Antistream configuration option Access Security A dial access security alarm is active Refer to the Security section of this table for dial access security conditions Minor VF Threshold One or more of the analog parameter thresholds have been exceeded The probable cause is poor line conditions or improper threshold settings Thresholds may be set through the DCP or NMS commands DTE Alarm One or more of the DTE signals are in alarm mode Refer to the Port 1 section of this table for Port 1 DTE alarm conditions Rate Fallback Due to poor line conditions the modem s transmit rate is below the configured rate Refer to Leased Line and Dial Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for a description of configuration options affecting rate Status Subtree Truncate Downstream hea
16. 2400 V 22bis 11 14 400 V 33 12 12 000 V 33 13 9600 V 29 14 7200 V 29 15 4800 V 29 16 4800 V 27 17 2400 V 27bis 18 19 200 V 32terbo 19 16 800 V 32terbo 20 19 200 TMp 21 14 400 TMp 22 9600 TMp 23 7200 TMp 24 4800 TMp 25 2400 TMp The factory setting is 19200 V 32terbo 45 Leased Tx Level Register determines the modem s transmit power Configure Edit output level over leased lines Leased Line Enter a value from 0 to 15 dBm The factory setting is 0 dBm S46 Auto Dial Backup Register determines if the modem performs an Configure Edit automatic dial backup if the leased lines fail Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Circular The factory setting is Disable 2 The range of allowable values is 0 through 15 in North America and 1 through 15 in other countries The default is country dependent 14 18 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 3 5 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S47 Auto Dial Standby Register determines if the modem performs an Configure Edit automatic dial standby if in Dial Backup mode Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 15 minutes 2 1 hour 3 4 hours 4 Test 2min 5 Adv 15min 6 Adv 30min 7 Adv 1 hr 8 Adv
17. 6 wire modular cord 125 0040 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 125 0053 1431 871A Adapter 002 0026 0031 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank H 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Active Operating Active Saved ADp analog loop analog signal Answer mode ASCII Async Dial asynchronous transmission AT Command mode AT command string AT commands AT prefix autobaud automatic answer automatic rate control backplane Glossary A configuration area containing configuration options currently in use by the modem When a power cycle occurs a reset is performed or a save is issued using the DCP this area is updated with the contents of Active Saved A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration options Any changes made to configuration options can be saved using either the DCP s Save command or by issuing an AT amp WO command Advanced Diagnostic protocol An enhanced diagnostic communication protocol used with the 6700 and 6800 Series NMS and with certain front panel diagnostic functions A test in which the modem s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver A type of signal composed of continuously variable values used to transmit voice or data over telephone lines The state of a modem that is ready to receive an incoming call American St
18. 7200 V 29 21 14 400 TMp 4 7200 V 32bis 15 4800 V 29 22 9600 TMp 5 4800 V 32bis 16 4800 V 27bis 23 7200 TMp 6 2400 V 22bis 17 2400 V 27bis 24 4800 TMp 11 14 400 V 33 18 19 200 V 32 terbo 25 2400 TMp 5 34 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 5 3 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo or V 32bis data rate V 32bis Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections The AT command is S Register S82 n where nis 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 1200 This configuration option is ignored unless Leased Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 bps or 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 1200 bps or 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems NOTE The 1200 selection bps is available only if the Pro
19. A configuration of data processing devices used for information exchange The customer assigned diagnostic address of a modem 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Glossary 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems NIM NMS nonlinear distortion off hook offline on hook online Originate mode parity PBX permissive interface phase jitter physical address point to point line poll list POTS power up self test protocol PSTN Quick Configuration display register remote remote loopback result code Network Interface Module The interface provided for the public switched telephone network PSTN There are two NIMs per carrier Network Management System A computer system used for monitoring and controlling network devices VF line distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line The state of a telephone or modem that is connected to the network The state of a modem that is not connected to another modem The state of a telephone or modem that is not connected to the network The state of a modem that is connected to and communicating with another modem The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a call In a dial network it is the modem that makes the call In a leased line network it is one of two sides of the network that is selected to be the originating modem A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bit
20. Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable September 1998 14 27 3910 A2 GN32 40 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 14 28 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Menu Tree Pages A 2 and A 3 provide a menu tree for the 391x Series modems 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Ea a Displays current status of modem along with data rate and error control mode to next page a Ld EditArea frm Tributary only I T fonerauna Customer2 Display Clear Change Add Acquire ustomer1 Factory Active Active Saved Delete Skip DeviceHS Identity Backup Record Sync_Leased TMp Sync_Dial VF DTE Options Async_Leased Async_Dial UNIX_Dial Major Ser Display Choose Mode mnor Mody Clear A Mode tatus ev Line Pri 4W APL o Daen PB Line pa 2W APL const A ine Bkup 2W APL Answer Trib Security Line Dial Backup Originate Port Line Dial ONLY Line No Sync l SigQual LSD RevLevelt 2 DTR Sig Noise12 DSR NrEchLv1 Tst Choose Function FarEchLv TXD FarEchDel RXD EchoFreqOfft gt RTS poninearpisi GTS Edit StrapGroup ae These parameters will appear for V 32terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Active Customer1 Customer2 i Tiere appear for Trellis Saved Sync Leased i Template only to next page a DTE_Interface
21. FUTURE USE 3800 V 35 3683500 RS366A V 25 OO0O00000000000 OO0O0000000000 e 496 14178b Figure 1 2 Model 3911 1 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Introduction The Model 3911 derives ac power from the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s backplane which is acommon bus to all devices installed in the carrier The user interface to any Model 3911 is through the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature which operates in a manner similar to the DCP on the Model 3910 For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has a total of 17 slots The first slot Slot 0 is reserved for the shared diagnostic unit SDU while the remaining 16 slots can house up to 16 Model 3911 modems or a combination of Model 3911 modems and other units For more details on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections United States NOTICE TO USERS OF THE PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the equipment is a label t
22. Line Dialer The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or originate calls Table 5 3 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 5 3 1 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options AutoAnswerRing 1 Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 Auto Answer Ring Count Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming call For example if this option is set to 2 then the answering modem answers after the second ring Disable If selected the modem must be answered using either the DCP s Answer command or Tlk Data function or via AT commands Refer Chapter 11 Talk Data Branch for more on Manual Answer NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 1 2 4 6 8 or 10 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 rings NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command for Disable is SO 0 The AT command is S Register SO n where nis a ring count from 1 to 255 Dialer Type Tone Nxt Tone Pulse Dialer Type Selects either tone DTMF dialing or pulse rotary dialing mode
23. Modem escapes into AT Command mode and a break character is not sent to the remote end The AT commands for Enable are KO K2 or K4 The AT commands for Disable are K1 K3 or K5 CommandCharEcho Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Command Character Echo Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in Command mode The AT command for Disable is EO The AT command for Enable is E1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 2 3 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options CarriageRtn Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Carriage Return Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The AT command is S Register S3 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 Backspace Char 008 ASCI Nxt 008 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Backspace Character Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode The AT command is S Register S5 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 Linefeed Char 010 ASCI Nxt 010 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Line Feed Character Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Comma
24. Select F2 f or F3 until the desired character is selected This can be an alpha or numeric character Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next character position Continue this key sequence until the dial command modifiers and telephone number are entered Refer to Table 10 1 for a list of valid dial command modifiers 01 9W5556789 maine ness eJl le amp 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 10 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To save the number just entered scroll to the next directory location by selecting Nxt The number is now stored in nonvolatile memory Table 10 1 describes what can be entered in directory locations Table 10 1 Valid Dial Command Modifiers Dial command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how when and what number to dial The following is a list of parameters the 391x Series modems recognize T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configu
25. Table 14 3 7 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S61 CT111 Rate Control Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled set for Fallback 1 or Fallback 2 CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate Control signal It is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Fallback 2 Fallback 2 The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface S62 V 25bis Coding Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 ASCII 1 EBCDIC The factory setting is ASCII Configure Edit DTE Dialer S63 V 25bis Idle Character Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Mark 1 Flag The factory setting is Mark Configure Edit DTE Dialer S64 V 25bis New Line Character Register identifies to the modem the type of line terminator used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Carriage Return and Line Feed 1 Carriage Return 2 Line Feed The factory setting is carriage return and li
26. The AT command is S Register S10 n where n is 255 for Disable or 0 to 254 in 0 1 second increments for Enable No Data Disc Disable Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min No Data Disconnect Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted and received within a specified amount of time Disable Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow m 10 30 60 min Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10 minute 30 minute or 60 minute intervals NOTE The factory default value is country dependent The AT command for Enable is Tn where nis from 1 minute to 255 minutes The AT command for Disable is TO Auto Make Busy Disable Nxt Disable Enable This option is only valid with the Model 3911 and does not appear on the Model 3910 s LCD Automatic Make Busy Forces the modem to go off hook under the following conditions if a local analog loopback is performed a self test is performed or if the modem is switched to the service line NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX The Make Busy Network Interface Module NIM must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S40 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 5 28 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 3 5 of
27. XON XOFF Passthrough Considers an XON XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem In this case the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE This is also known as DTE to DTE flow control m Disable Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem m Enable Flow control characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem The AT command for Disable is X0 The AT command for Enable is X1 Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP_or_Buffr LAPM_or_Bufr or BufferMode Modem to Modem Flow Control If a modem s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem but is not passing on to the DTE it can issue XON XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem This only applies if Buffer nonerror control mode is selected If Error Control mode is enabled flow control between the modems will happen automatically regardless of the setting of this option m Disable Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line Also the modem will not transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full m Enable Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receives an XOFF character over the VF line An XON ch
28. and blank Table 4 2 provides information about the Status Backup screens The first column lists all possible configurations for the modem s currently active line The second column lists all possible configurations for the modem s inactive lines The third column provides information about the inactive line condition XXXX represents the condition code of the inactive line 4 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Status Branch Table 4 2 Backup Status Screens Active Line 1st Screen Display Inactive Line 2nd Screen Display Possible Inactive Backup Line Condition Line Pri 4w APL or Line Pri 2w APL Bckup 2wAPL XXXX or Bckup Dial blank Good indicates that line continuity is detected Bad indicates that line continuity is not detected 222 indicates that the line condition is unknown Backup Facility Check is making its first determination of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates that the Backup Line Check option is disabled Line Bkup 2w APL or Line Dial Backup Pri 4w APL or Pri 2w APL XXXX XXXX Good indicates the line condition is good Bad indicates the line condition is bad 222 indicates the line condition is unknown Lease Lookback has not had enough time to make an initial appraisal of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates the Lease Loopback option is disabled Line Dial Only No second screen displ
29. lt A O AN Le W le we From the Security branch press gt until Reset_Security appears Select Reset_Security Reset Security gt A Abort_Sec_Reset A F1 F2 F3 gt To abort this function select Abort_Sec_Reset Nothing is erased and the LCD returns to the main security display Reset Security lt A Erase_All_Passwd A To Reset Security press until Erase_All_PassWd appears on the LCD Select Erase_All_PassWd The entire security database is erased and the Administrative Password defaults to the Reset Default password value Refer to page 12 21 for the Reset Default password value This concludes the description of the functions found in the Security branch of the Top Level menu tree The following section describes the security configuration options found within the Configure branch of the Top Level menu tree 12 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Security Configuration Options The Security Configuration Options group allows you to view and set dial access security parameters This group is located in the Configuration branch of the Top Level menu Table 12 4 shows each Security configuration option as it appears on the LCD The factory default value is shown after the colon on the first line all available selections are listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option These configurat
30. 001 to 256 5 50 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 8 4 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Diag Connection Modem DC Nxt Modem DC NMS CC Disable This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary Diagnostic Connection Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic channel that is connected to another modem DC or a control channel that is connected to a network management device CC Modem Selects the Diagnostic Channel NMS Selects the Control Channel Disable Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port Mixed Trib F W No Nxt No Yes This configuration option is only available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp Control Mixed Tributary Firmware Establishes that a multipoint network has TMp tributary modems using firmware prior to Release GO2 60 xx No Multipoint network modems do not have mixed firmware m Yes Multipoint network modems do have mixed firmware Link Delay sec 0 1 Nxt 0 1 2 5 10 20 50 Link Delay Seconds Controls the length of time in seconds a modem will wait for responses from the downstream devices This configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection NOTE The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is ente
31. 1 second increments A value of 255 disables this register The factory setting is 20 2 seconds 12 Escape Guard Time Register sets the value in 20 millisecond Configure Edit increments for the required pause before and after the escape DTE Dialer sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters Enter a value from 0 255 in 20 millisecond increments The factory setting of 50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second 18 Test Time out Register sets the duration in seconds for the modem Configure Edit tests This automatically cancels any test in progress after the time of Tests this register expires Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape sequence followed by the amp T0 command Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The factory setting is Disable 0 S26 RTS to CTS Delay Register sets the length of time in 10 millisecond Configure Edit DTE Interface 1 The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 14 16 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 3 3 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S40 Auto Make Busy Register determines if the modem goes off hook Configure Edit under certain conditions This register should only be enabled when Line Dialer the modem is located behind a user
32. 10min 5min 1min Dial Standby Time Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines CarrierOn Level 43dbm Nxt 43dbm 26dbm 33dbm Carrier On Level Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines When the power level of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this level 26 dBm 33 dBm or 43 dBm LSD turns OFF When the carrier signal is greater than this level LSD turns ON For TMp Control 26dbm is the factory default The AT command is S Register S48 n where nis 0 for 43 dBm 1 for 26 dBm and 2 for 33 dBm 5 36 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 5 5 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options V27bis Train Short Nxt Short Long This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V27bis V 27bis Train Controls the train time for V 27bis operation The AT command is S Register S70 n where nis 0 for Short and 1 for Long V29 TrainOnData Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Train On Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well The AT command is S Register S92 n where n is 0
33. 3 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX _ a TX DTE Leased DTE Sync Fi 3910 A ae 3910 B Sync Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 3 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup Configuration Options 3910 A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EI A 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 3 Use part number 125 0067 0031 a 6 position 4 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL G 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Sample Configurations Point to Point with Network Management Figure G 4 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with network management 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX gt TX DTE Leased DTE 3910 A Sync NMS iF 3910 B Sync Cable 1 2690 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 300 cc Hubbing IN Device x Cable 4 or 6800 _ Adapter 002 0025 0031
34. 3 5 3 7 5 8 government_requirements Canada United States 1 5 1 6 handshaking seq uence 11 2 11 3 hang up hardware part number HPt 4 6 HDLC 5 20 D 1 Health and Status definitions 4 94 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Index Identity 4 6 Make Busy indicators Automatic 5 28 definitions 3 6 NIM status LEDs 3 343 5 Via DTR installation manual dial See Talk Data Modell 3910 2 24 2 12 menu Mode 3911 2 91 2 structure 3 8 q pick guration display 3 13 messages K Lcp 3 83 14 4 91l4 10 result codes 14 34114 4 keypad 3 7 Misc configuration options group 5 484 5 51 Pisae mixed inbound rates Mixed Tributary Paan MNP L error control LCD liquid c sial display MNP5 data compression description model number Mod 4 6 menu srt 3 8 modifiers dial string 10 8 14 51 14 6 modulation dial line 5 30 5 34 modulation pone dial line 1 8 5 30 14 17 leased line Ts sf Te multipoint EAE ra messages S614 9 Lease Lockback leased backup epemtan See backup leased leased line data rate dual mode Leased Line en options group 5 3345 38 leased line connection a leased line operation 5 3345 38 B 2 N tage network interface module NIM 2 2 7 6 LEDs status indicators 3p network management address 5 50 6 2 line connection netw
35. 3600 Hubbing Device to the network management channel Figure G 4 in Appendix G Sample Configuration Power Supply Connection Use the following procedures to connect the modem to an ac power outlet 1 Make sure the modem s power switch is in the OFF position 2 Insert the power supply s 8 pin DIN connector into the modem s rear panel dc power receptacle Figure 2 1 3 Connect the power supply to a grounded ac power outlet Modem Power Up Once your modem is properly connected to the power supply leased and or dial lines and the DTE press the modem s rear panel power switch to the ON position The modem begins a power up self test in which all DCP LEDs light This test takes several seconds to perform and verifies the operation of most hardware components within the modem If successful the LCD displays Power on Selftst Passed and continues to the Top Level menu screen Power On Selftst A Passed A a ro gt If a failure occurs during the self test the LCD displays Power On Selftst Failed for several seconds The LCD then displays the Top Level menu screen with the message Power on Fail appearing on the top line of the LCD Although a failure has occurred the modem will attempt to operate This allows you to activate a more thorough self test using the Test branch Refer to Chapter 8 Test Branch 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 2 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Select
36. 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options MakeBusyVia DTR Disable End Disable Enable Make Busy Via DTR Determines if the modem goes off hook when DTR is OFF Enable this setting if the DTE normally keeps DTR ON and turns DTR OFF when the DTE cannot accept a call NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX For 3911 modems the Make Busy Network Interface Modules NIMs must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S69 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 29 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Dial Line The Dial Line configuration options are used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines Table 5 4 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 5 4 1 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options Dial Line Rate 19200 V32t Nxt 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A 0 300
37. 5 30 5 32 dial standby automatic 5 36 restoring service time 5 36 Dial Tone Detect 5 25 Dial Transmit Level 5 31 Dialer Type 5 25 digital loopback 8 54 8 10 dimensions directo dial telephone number 10 6 10 8 10 9110 10 disconnect line current 5 27 long space no carrier no data options reloaded after 5 48 disconnecting a call 10 3 f10 7 Download Software 7 7 DSR Control DTE connerton 2 ae status 3 3 3 5 4 7 DTE Dialer configuration options group 5 1945 24 DTE Dialer Type 5 20 DTE Interface configuration options group 5 94 5 19 DTE rate forced to VF rate 5 18 DTR Action 5 12 Dual Leased Line dual leased line operation See backup leased EIA LEDs 7 447 7 EJA 232 D cable connection status 3 34 3 5 end to end pattern test environment 1 9 equipment customer sup plied 2 2 list error control fallback character 5 41 Negotiate Buffer 5 41 escape character J5 21 14 1 14 15 Extend Main Channel Ca faceplate 1 4 3 2 factory default configurations 2 6 2 8 F 24F 7 Fast Disconnect 5 27 features 1 1 firmware mixed tributary firmware part number FPt 4 6 firmware revision level FRev firmware upgrades download flow control modem to modem of DTE of modem XON XOFF 5 43 frame size maximum front panel See diagnostic control panel function keys
38. A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial network See PSTN One of a leased line device s operational states The Dial Standby mode allows the device to switch back to leased line operation while still maintaining the dial line A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone number A signal composed of only two discrete values representing the binary digits 0 and 1 Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers Each directory location can have up to 40 characters entered Canadian Department of Communication 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Glossary 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems download downstream device DTE edit area EIA EIA RS 232 error control escape sequence extended network extended result codes fallback FCC FEC FEP full duplex function key half duplex handshaking HDLC hidden choice indicator host Hz idle state A process that transfers device firmware and software from a locally attached PC to a device or allows the duplication of firmware and software from a local device to a remote device A device that is connected farther from the host computer Data Terminal Equipment The equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals for transmission A temporary work area used to view and change configuration options
39. AT commands the modem will only place a call if a valid password is entered along with an AT dial command If the password is not entered then ERROR is returned to the DTE and the dial command is canceled NOTE This configuration option enables or disables security protection used for outbound calls when using the AT command autodialer function 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Security Password Entry Techniques The previous sections described how to set up and configure your network for dial access security Once configured and enabled you must now supply a password to originate or answer a call The following examples demonstrate how to enter an Answer Access security password string and an Originate Access password string Answer Access Password VF Side and DTE Side Entry Techniques Answer Access password security uses two password entry techniques VF side password and DTE side password entry A VF side password consists of DTMF tones and is entered by the originating caller via the AT command set the DCP or manually with an attached telephone A VF side password can be entered with the AT dial command The following examples illustrate two ways to enter a VF side password TYPE Where ATDT5551234W 12345678 or ATDP5551234T 12345678 ATD is the AT dial command P and T are Pulse dial and Tone DTMF dial modifiers 5551234 is the phone number W is the second d
40. AT commands for Sync Mode are amp M1 amp M2 amp M3 or amp Q1 amp Q2 amp Q3 Async DTE Rate 19200 Nxt 19200 57600 38400 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0 300 This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous DTE Data Rate Identifies the asynchronous DTE s operating rate to the modem Data rates from 57 600 bps to 300 bps are supported NOTE To prevent losing data in 57 600 bps applications a 16650 UART on the PC s serial port is required as well as a communications package which can take advantage of its 16 byte buffer In addition a 386 PC 25 MHz or faster is required and the RS232 cable length must be minimized to reduce capacitance NOTE To configure the Async DTE Rate different than the modem rate ensure that the Error Control Mode configuration option see the V 42 MNP Buffer section is set to BufferMode The AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate Asyn Data Bits 8 Nxt 8 7 9 DirectMde 6 DirectMde This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Data Bits Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6 7 8 or 9 data bits This data length excludes start parity and stop bits a 8 Sets data length to 8 data bits a7 Sets data length to 7 data bits m 9 DirectMode Sets data length to 9 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode m
41. Async 2 scroll down until the Asyn Data Bits configuration option appears and set it to 7 data bits 3 scroll down and set the Asyn Parity Bit configuration option to Odd 4 scroll through the DTE Interface group until the Async Sync Mode configuration option appears and set it to Sync 5 move up one level in the menu tree or move to the Top Level menu and follow the LCD messages to save the new modem settings m V 25bis HDLC Selects V 25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as bit oriented protocol This framing protocol uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block m DTR Direct1 Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever DTR turns ON DTR dialing cannot be used if dial access security is enabled AT amp T Exclusive Enables a subset of the proprietary AT amp T command set which is required for some applications that use AT amp T equipment Currently the only application supported is AT amp T DATAKIT The AT commands for AT are amp MO amp M1 amp M3 or amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q3 The AT commands for DTR Direct1 dialing are amp M2 or amp Q2 5 20 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 2 2 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options AT Escape Char 043 ASCI Nxt 043 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE
42. DTE Table 12 6 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords DTE Password Only Index Password Type Assigned to 1001 winter DTE_Entry User A 1002 summer DTE_Entry User B 1003 spring DTE_Entry User C 1004 fall DTE_Entry User D 1005 Z DTE_Entry User E 1006 3g8sX4 DTE_ Entry User F 12 18 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Table 12 7 is an example of a security database table that uses a mixture of VF and DTE passwords Table 12 7 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side and DTE Side Passwords VF and DTE Passwords Index Password Type Assigned to 121 1 VF_Entry Denver office 131 12 VF_plus_ DTE Chicago office 141 1212 VF_plus_DTE Dallas office 151 953246 VF_plus_ DTE Miami office modem 1 152 46958373 VF_plus_ DTE Miami office modem 2 161 32562682 VF_Entry Atlanta office 1131 winter DTE_Entry User C Chicago office 1141 summer DTE_Entry User A Dallas office 1142 spring DTE_Entry User B Dallas office 1151 fall DTE_Entry User D Miami office 1152 Z DTE_Entry User E Miami office 1153 3g8sX4 DTE_Entry User F Miami office Users in the Denver and Atlanta offices are connected to the DTE after entering a valid VF password and the modems train and negotiate error control without entering a DTE password Users
43. DTE and modem is the value of the Async DTE Rate configuration option m Enable The data rate between the DTE and modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate The AT command is S Register S90 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 5 18 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 1 10 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Extend Main Ch Disable Nxt Disable Enable Primary data can only be extended one link Extend Main Channel This configuration option supports extended diagnostics Specifies whether there is main primary channel connectivity between the modem s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below downstream or above upstream in the diagnostic network m Enable If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is propagated to the modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port m Disable If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is not propagated for that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode NOTE For an extended control modem this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where the main primary channel is extended Upstream Port Port1 Nxt Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 Ports Port6 Por
44. Description Command Sequence amp Vn View Configuration Options Displays each configuration group within the None Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration areas as well as the telephone numbers stores in directory locations 1 24 amp Vo Active Operating configuration options amp V1 Active Saved configuration options amp V2 Customer 1 configuration options amp V3 Customer 2 configuration options amp V4 Directory locations 1 24 amp Wn Write Save to Memory Saves the current configuration options in Configure Save Active Operating to one of three configuration areas amp WO Saved to Active Save amp W1 Saved to Customer 1 amp W2 Saved to Customer 2 amp Xn Transmit Clock Source Configure Edit amp X0 Internal Modem provides transmit clock source for DTE Interface synchronous data Pin 15 amp X1 External Modem derives external transmit clock source provided on Pin 24 for synchronous data amp X2 Receive Clock Loop Modem derives transmit clock source from receive signal for synchronous data Pin 17 amp Zn x Store Telephone Numbers Modem saves the telephone numbers and Call Setup dial command modifiers if any entered for x up to 40 characters in Change length in Directory Location n 1 24 For example the command Directory AT amp Z1 5551234 stores the telephone number 555 1234 into directory location 1 To clear a telephone number from a memory location issue
45. EchoFreqOff Signal Quality displays the condition of the VF line Possible values are Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal These values appear for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Receive Signal Level displays in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm the actual strength of the incoming signal This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Signal to Noise Ratio displays in decibels the receive signal strength relative to noise on the line This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Near End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the local line termination This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Far End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the remote line termination This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Far End Echo Delay displays the roundtrip delay in milliseconds of the far end echo This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Echo Frequency Offset displays the frequency offset of the far end echo This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 5 COMSP
46. Hook Switch Control HO Call Setup HO Modem goes on hook pee 9I H1 Modem goes off hook ieee each Make Busy H1 Control Make Busy In Identification Status Identity I0 Displays product code 144 I1 Displays 3 digit firmware revision number I2 Performs an EPROM check Ln Speaker Volume Control Speaker LO Selects low volume oe L1 Selects low volume ee L2 Selects medium volume L3 Selects high volume Mn Speaker On Off Control Speaker MO Speaker always OFF oe M1 Speaker ON until carrier signal is detected ne M2 Speaker always ON 14 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 3 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence O Return to Online or Data Mode Returns modem to Data mode from None Online Command mode P Pulse Dial Sets the modem for Pulse Dial mode Configure Edit Line Dialer NOTE Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and Sweden Qn Result Codes Configure Edit Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE DTE Dialer Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE Q2 Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to the DTE Required for most UNIX applications Sn r Change S Register Changes contents of S Register where n is the None S Register and ris the new value Sn Display S Register Displays value of S Register where n is the None S Register number T Tone Di
47. Local Analog Loopback To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test a A ar A eJ CJ e Press the key until Loc_Analog_Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Local Loop A eee A eaa Ee E NOTE For tributary modems only the test is delayed 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate upstream before the VF channel is interrupted by the test 8 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Test Branch The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 A Ring Indicate during this test can cause errors To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key Rem Digital Loop This test is not available when using TMp modulation or Remote mode Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback ITU T V 54 Loop 2 Figure 8 2 This test can verify the integrity of the local modem the commu
48. NOTE For 6800 Series NMS applications Disable must be selected The AT commands are S Register S66 n where n is 0 for Call Connect amp Progress 1 for Disable 2 for Call Connect Only and 3 for Call Progress Only NetworkPosition Tributary End Tributary Control Network Position Identification Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE This configuration option is only applicable for leased line network management applications For the Model 3910 Tributary is the factory default For the Model 3911 Control is the factory default The AT command for Tributary is S74 0 The AT command for Control is S74 1 NetMngmtAddress 256 Nxt 256 This configuration option is not available in point to point tributaries Network Management Address Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using DCP functions that require network management addresses Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address Each tributary modem must have a different network management address NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE A point to point tributary is always Address 1 Address values range from 001 to 256 The AT command is S Register S75 n where nis a value from 0 to 255
49. The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 Displays the DTE mode The letter A indicates the modem is in Asynchronous mode and S indicates the modem is in Synchronous mode Displays the line mode The letters LA indicate Leased Answer mode LO indicate Leased Originate mode and D indicates Dial mode Displays the modem DTE port that is currently being displayed by the EIA status indicators on the DCP P1 indicates Port 1 CC indicates Control Channel DC indicates Diagnostic Channel Displays the modem s modulation scheme as shown below V32t indicates V 32 terbo modulation V32b indicates V 32bis modulation V32 indicates V 32 modulation TMp indicates Trellis Multipoint modulation V22b indicates V 22bis modulation V27b indicates V 27bis modulation V33 indicates V 33 modulation V29 indicates V 29 modulation V22 indicates V 22 modulation V23 indicates V 23 modulation V21 indicates V 21 modulation 212A indicates Bell 212A modulation 103J indicates Bell 103J modulation To exit the Quick Configuration function and return to the Top Level menu press the A or A key 3 14 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Status Branch 4 The Status branch of the Top Level menu allows you to view the current status of the leased line or dial connection the identity for example serial number and model number of your equipment and the DTE interface DeviceHS Major Minor Sta
50. To access Control from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A Control Test lt RATE gt Press the key until Control appears Select Control Speaker Speaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to the modem s speaker volume Upon a reset speaker volume returns to its configured setting For more information on speaker settings refer to Misc in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration To access Speaker from the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A Speaker ee A lt BARE gt Select Speaker Speaker Control gt A Off Low Med A lt a oe r gt Press the gt key and appropriate function keys to choose the desired selection DCP selections are Off Turns the speaker off Low Adjusts the speaker to low volume Med Adjusts the speaker to medium volume High Adjusts the speaker to high volume The message Command Complete appears on the LCD To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 7 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch Reset Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform a complete program restart The modem begins the power up test sequence that ends with the Top Level menu displayed on the LCD Configuration options stored in an Active Saved configuration area are copie
51. V 25bis commands supported by the 391x Series modems and the response to those commands Tables D 1 and D 2 list the V 25bis commands and response messages NOTE The 391x Series modem must be configured for V 25bis dialing Refer to DTE Dialer Type configuration option in Table 5 3 of Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Call Request Commands Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to the modem and are responsible for initiating dial calls Call Request commands include Call Request with Number Provided CRN and Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS Call Request with Number Provided CRN The CRN command dials the telephone number entered from the DTE CRN is similar to the ATD command The CRN command format is CRNn Where n is the telephone number to be dialed 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 D 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS The CRS command dials the telephone number stored in the request directory location CRS is similar to the ATDS command The CRS command format is CRSx Where x is directory location 1 24 The modem responds to the command with either a VAL valid or INV invalid response followed by a call progress report such as connect CNX or failure CFI Call Response A Call Response indicates if the command was accepted by the modem Call Response includes Call Failure Indication CFI and Call Connecting C
52. V21 0 300 103J 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 Dial Line Rate This configuration option determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset m 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation at the data rate selected m 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected m 0 300 V21 0O 300 103u Modem operates in full duplex Asynchronous mode These data rates do not support V 42 or MNP error control m 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 The modem will run in asynchronous semi full duplex mode at the rate chosen The AT command is S Register S41 n where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 6 2400 V 22bis 12 1200 75 V 23 20 19200 V 32 terbo 2 12 000 V 32bis 7 1200 V 22 13 75 1200 V 23 21 16800 V 32 terbo 3 9600 V 32bis V 32 8 1200 212A 18 600 75 V 23 4 7200 V 32bis 10 0 300 V 21 19 75 600 V 23 5 4800 V 32bis V 32 11 0 300 103J 5 30 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 4 2 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V32bis Automode Enable Nxt Enable Disable System 85 This configuration optio
53. a new value is selected End appears when you have scrolled down to the last configuration option available in that group Selecting End returns you to the top of the configuration group You are free to enter that group again or scroll left or right to the next configuration options group The key takes you one step up in the Configure branch each time it is pressed The A key causes you to exit the Configure branch and return to the Top Level menu If any changes are made to configuration options the DCP allows you to save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas The lt and keys move selections across the LCD The function keys F1 F2 and F3 select the LCD choice that appears above that function key 5 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Configuration Tables DTE Interface The modem s configuration options are arranged into nine groups based on functionality DTE Interface Table 5 1 DTE Dialer Table 5 2 Line Dialer Table 5 3 Dial Line Table 5 4 Leased Line Table 5 5 V 42 MNP Buffer Table 5 6 Test Table 5 7 Misc Table 5 8 and Security Chapter 12 Throughout these tables two selections frequently appear on the LCD Enable and Disable Unless otherwise stated Enable selects a configuration option and makes it available for use Disable makes a configuration option unavailable for use NOTE In some countries the
54. allows you to switch the modem between Talk mode and Data mode when manually dialing using either the DCP or an externally attached telephone To add an external telephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone refer to Appendix C Pin Assignments This cable is not supplied with your modem On initial power up the modem is in Talk mode When in Talk mode the modem is disconnected and you are free to use the telephone When in Data mode the modem is connected and data can be transmitted or received This function is not available for Model 3911 modems Tik Data The following sections describe three uses of the Talk Data function 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 11 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Auto Answer NOTE On the remote modem the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration must be set to Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Auto Answer perform the following procedure Idle 19 2 A Tik Data A Press the key until Tlk Data appears Lift the attached handset and dial the telephone number of the remote modem When the remote modem answers it transmits an answe
55. applications Factory is a read only unchangeable configuration area containing six sets of predefined configuration options labeled Syne Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you must choose either Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode These sets contain the most commonly used configurations options for modems installed into these hardware environments These predefined configuration options are intended to give you a head start and only require a minimum of changes to the default settings Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Default Configuration Options NOTE If you are using AT commands a period of time can exist in which the contents of Active Operating and Active Saved differ Once you issue an AT amp WO write command however the two storage areas are identical 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Figures 5 1 and 5 2 graphically display the interaction between the edit area and configuration areas as viewed from the perspective of the DCP and the AT command set CONTENTS OF Active Saved ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED TO Active Operating WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE DCP ON A RESET OR ON POWER UP Active Operating Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Factory e Sync Leased Answer Originat
56. at 48 and 3 for Start at 96 V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 1200 This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps or 1200 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps or 1200 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems NOTE The 1200 bps selection is available only if the Proprietary 1200 device option is installed Dial TX Level The factory default setting is country dependent It is Permissv 9 in North America Nxt Permissv 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Dial Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over dial lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 9 dBm to 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm plus Permissive 9 dBm This configuration option is locked in other countries the user cannot change the level The AT command is amp In where nis from 10 to 32 corresponding to 10 dBm to 32 dBm 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 31 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 4 3 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V22b Guard Tone Disable Nxt Disable 550Hz 1800
57. bag when it is removed from the carrier The Model 3911 is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies both the operating power and the leased and or dial network connections For additional information about the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has 17 slots which can hold up to 16 modems and one shared diagnostic unit SDU The SDU is required when the modems in the carrier are controlled by an NMS or when multiple carriers in a cabinet configuration are to be controlled by a single shared diagnostic control panel SDCP The SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier is the user interface to the Model 3911 modem A single SDCP can control up to eight carriers containing up to 128 compatible modems The installation of a Model 3911 varies slightly if an SDCP is installed on the front of the carrier To install a Model 3911 modem into the carrier without an SDCP perform the following steps 1 At the rear of the carrier install the rear connector plate Make sure the plate uses the same slot position as that intended for the modem Loosely fasten the plate This allows for slight adjustments later when installing the modem 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 2 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems 3000 SERIES SDU CARRIER 7 2 2 S gt 2 2 2 A MODEL 3911 MODE
58. branch make the following selections Control A Download_Code Press the key until Download_Code appears Press any function key to select Download_Code The DwnLoadSoftware screen appears DwnLoadSoftware gt a Clone_Remote A Press any function key to select Clone_Remote The next screen to appear is determined by the modem s configuration Refer to the appropriate section Point to Point Broadcast or Multipoint 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations Before using Clone Remote in point to point configurations perform the following e Make sure the 391x Series modems have an established leased line connection using either V 33 V 32terbo V 32bis V 32 or V 29 modulation refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 or a dial network connection using either V 32terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation refer to Dial Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration e Make sure the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to the Misc section in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration e Make sure the password Remote Access Password configuration option is the same in both the local and remote modems For an example of how to change the password refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration After completing these checks proceed to Implementing a Cl
59. for Disable and 1 for Enable V29 Retrain Enable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems The AT command is S Register S93 n where nis 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable V29 Link Config PointToPoint Nxt PointToPoint Multipoint This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Link Configuration Selects point to point or multipoint operation NOTE Remote mode and the Cloning function are not available when configured for V 29 Multipoint The AT command is S Register S94 n where nis 0 for PointToPoint and 1 for Multipoint TMp Train Time 50 Nxt 50 10 20 100 200 300 This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time selections The AT command is S Register S95 n where nis 0 for 10 milliseconds 1 for 20 milliseconds 2 for 50 milliseconds 3 for 100 milliseconds 4 for 200 milliseconds and 5 for 300 milliseconds TMp TxPreemphasis Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured fo
60. has the following values 0 PointToPoint 1 Multipoint The factory setting is PointToPoint Configure Edit Leased S95 Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time selections Register has the following values 0 10 milliseconds 1 20 milliseconds 2 50 milliseconds 3 100 milliseconds 4 200 milliseconds 5 300 milliseconds The factory setting is 0 10 milliseconds Configure Edit Leased S96 Trellis Multipoint TMp Tx Preemphasis Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line attenuation Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Leased 14 26 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 3 13 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S97 Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size Register limits the modem s Configure Edit buffer size to a maximum of 20 characters V42 MNP Buffer Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 98 Special Standby Supports automatic dial standby when a third modem Configure Edit is used for dial backup Leased Register has the following values 0
61. in Buffer mode This is also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode m MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also Known as Reliable mode Buffer Mode Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate This mode should only be used if the DTE provides its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated This setting is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set to Direct mode Direct Mode Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate The modem never connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate Ultimately the modem speed and DTE speed must be the same Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering LAPM or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode If this fails the modem disconnects LAPM or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode NOTE The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased line modulation if V 42 error control or Buffer mode are enabled with V 32bis or TMp on leased lines 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 39 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 6 2 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Conf
62. indicates that the value for this configuration option does not appear on the LCD when that factory default configuration is selected 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 F 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 1 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial a Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Interface Async Sync Sync Async Sync Async Async Sync Mode Async DTE Rate N A 19 200 bps N A 19 200 bps 19 200 bps N A Async Data N A 8 N A 8 8 N A Bits Async Parity Bit N A None N A None None N A Async Stop Bits N A 1 N A 1 1 N A DTR Action Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 DSR Control Standard Forced On Standard Forced On Forced On Standard RS232 RS232 RS232 RTS Action Standard Ignore NA Trib or Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 Ignore Control RS232 RTS Antistream N A N A 10 sec Trib or N A N A N A N A Control CTS Control Standard Forced On Standard Forced On Wink When Standard RS232 RS232 Disc RS232 RTS CTS Delay 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec LSD Control Standard Standard Standard Standard Wink When Standard RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 Disc RS232 TX Clock Source Internal N A RXC Loop Trib N A N A Internal or Internal Control Backup TX Clock N A N A N A N A N A N A Source XTXC Clamps N A N A N A N A N A N A TXC CT111 Rate Disable D
63. is amp T5 V54 Address Disable Nxt Disable Address Values This configuration option is not available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp V 54 Address Determines which remote 391x Series modem is placed into a remote loopback test This test can be either a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback This type of addressing is recommended for use in extended data circuits tail circuits Disable This is used for normal point to point leased line and dial networks m Address Values 01 03 05 07 09 OB OD OF 11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 2B 2D 2F 33 35 37 3B 3D 3F 55 57 5B 5F 6F 77 or 7F This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a loopback test This option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems used in extended data circuits tail circuits can be commanded to loopback The AT command for Disable is S Register S53 0 The AT command for V 54 Address is S Register S53 n where nis a value from 1 to 34 V54 Device Type Peripheral End Peripheral Intermediate This configuration option is only available if V54 Address is enabled and the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network Peripheral The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back to back with another modem m Intermediate The modem is either of the tw
64. is a directory location D 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ITU T V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses List Delayed Numbers Response LSD LSD is a response to an LSD command issued by DTE LSDx3n d Where x is a Sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number d is the delay in minutes List Forbidden Numbers Response LSF The LSF response format is LSFx n Where x is a sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number List Stored Numbers Response LSN LSN is a response to an RLN command issued by the DTE If a directory location is specified then the telephone number for that location appears If no directory location is specified then all telephone numbers stored in memory appear The LSN response format is LSNx n Command Response A Command Response indicates that the command entered was a valid or invalid entry Command Response includes Valid VAL and Invalid INV Valid VAL The VAL response indicates that the modem has accepted the V 25bis command issued by the DTE VAL is similar to the AT result code OK 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 D 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Invalid INV The INV response indicates that the modem has received an incorrect V 25bis command from the DTE INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR The INV response format is INVxx Where XX iS CU command unknown MS message syntax error PS parame
65. modem is compatible with your receiving modem Verify that the originating modem recognizes your modem s answer tone Verify that the originating modem supports your modem s modulation schemes The 391x Series modem recognizes CCITT V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21 Bell 212A and Bell 103J The 391x Series modem does not support other vendors proprietary modulation schemes Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the originating modem to see if they connect The Originate Mode does not function properly Verify that the modem s DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to the correct setting either AT DTR Dialing V 25bis Async V 25bis Bisync or V 25bis HDLC Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration B 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Troubleshooting Table B 5 2 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action The modem does not go off hook and begin dialing If using AT Dialing refer to Table B 4 Modem DTE Connection If using DTR Dialing verify the telephone number stored in directory location 1 and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a dial If using V 25bis Async verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit and the carriage return and line feed are used as command terminators If using V 25bis Bisync verify that the correct character format uses two
66. of 2 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Dial Make Busy Mode The modem is in a Make Busy condition Service Line Model 3911 only The modem installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has been switched to a service line Short Hold Time The modem s dial hold time has been shortened Non Answering The modem is in a non answering mode Thresh RSL High The received signal level RSL has exceeded the upper threshold Threshd RSL Low The RSL is less than the lower threshold Threshld SNR Threshold The signal to noise ratio has exceeded the threshold Non linear Dist The non linear distortion has exceeded the threshold Retrains The number of retrains has exceeded the threshold Signal Quality The signal quality is less than the threshold Far Echo Threshd The far end echo level has exceeded the threshold Near Echo Thresh The near end echo level has exceeded the threshold Security Database Reset The security database has been reset passwords erased Password Protect Security password protection has been enabled Mode Change There has been a change in security mode Refer to Chapter 12 Dial Access Security eee A security password has been changed Database Change The security database containing passwords has been changed Port 1 Rx Data Alarm The DTE port s RXD signal is in an alarm condition Tx Data Alarm The DTE port s TXD signal is in an alarm condition DTR Alarm The DTE port s DTR
67. or Skip The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be changed The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt 1 and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to implement the function yyyyyy you selected Active Delete or Skip The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list change has occurred If the message Poll List Check appears you have attempted to delete an address that was not on the poll list or you have attempted to add an address that was already on the poll list If the message Poll List Error appears you are in a point to point mode that does not support secondary channel V 29 If the message Poll Lst too Big appears you have entered a number greater than the maximum number of downstream devices To return to the selected function Active Delete or Skip press the A key The address automatically increments upon returning to this function To exit this function Active Delete or Skip and remain in the PList Change branch press the Z key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 6 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Poll List Branch Add Acquire The Add function does not appear in Remote mode or on control modems Add allows you
68. rs gt Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt t10000000 ness Select the F2 ft key to increment password values RemAccssPasswrd ey ie 10000000 A Sct JJ amp Press the key to move the cursor to the next position RemAccssPasswrd A ie 12345678 a e e a Continue this sequence until you have entered the new password value September 1998 5 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Summary To save the new password to a configuration area make the following selections RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt t12345678 ay ey ed Press the A key to scroll up twice Choose Function A Edit Save anes Select Save Sav EditArea to gt A E lt Ge Le lL Select a configuration area Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 to save the changes Select the A key to exit to the Top Level menu or select the AA key to remain in the Configure branch When using the DCP to edit configuration options keep the following in mind Nxt has two functions First it indicates that more configuration options are available within that group These are accessed by selecting Nxt pressing F1 and scrolling down to the next configuration option Second it indicates that what is displayed on the LCD is the current setting If you scroll left or right Nxt disappears and reappears if
69. s Private Branch Exchange PBX This register is only valid for Model 3911 modems Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable S41 Dial Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and Configure Edit modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Dial Line Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32bis 2400 V 22bis 1200 V 22 1200 212A ine 0 300 V 21 11 0 300 103d 12 1200 75 V 23 13 75 1200 V 23 18 600 75 V 23 19 75 600 V 23 20 19 200 V 32terbo 21 16 800 V 32terbo The factory setting is 19200 V 32terbo 43 V 32bis Train Register controls the modem s train time for Configure Edit V 32bis V 32 mode Dial Line Register has the following values 0 Long 1 Short The factory setting is Long 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 17 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 3 4 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence 44 Leased Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and Configure Edit modulation scheme for operation on either 2 wire or 4 wire leased Leased Line lines in either Answer or Originate mode Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32bis 6
70. signal is in an alarm condition CTS Alarm The DTE port s CTS signal is in an alarm condition RTS Alarm The DTE port s RTS signal is in an alarm condition DSR Alarm The DTE port s DSR signal is in an alarm condition LSD Alarm The DTE port s LSD signal is in an alarm condition Auto Stream Dis The modem is in an Antistreaming condition Refer to the Streaming DTE message in the Major Alarm section of this table Disabled The modem s DTE port has been disabled Not supported in every modulation To exit DeviceHS and remain in the Status Branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key 4 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Status Branch VF VF displays the condition of the leased or dial connection To access VF from the Status branch make the following selection zx Status gt DeviceHS VF A EJ e e amp Select VF Cz Status VF gt SigQual Excelent A leje tJ If the modem is receiving a signal the signal quality appears on the LCD s bottom line Press the gt key to scroll and view the receive signal level signal to noise ratio near end echo level far end echo level far end echo delay and echo frequency offset If the modem is not receiving a signal the message No Signal appears on the LCD SigQual RevLevel Sig Noise NrEchLvl FarEchLvl FarEchDel
71. slot in the carrier A Key The lt lt key returns you to the Top Level menu display from anywhere in the menu tree Pressing A while changing configuration options displays the message Save Straps Yes No If No is selected changes made to configuration options are not saved and the Top Level menu appears If Yes is selected then changes are saved to either Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas A Key The A key moves you up one level in the menu tree lt i and Keys Use the lt and keys to move the viewing window left or right and to scroll the remaining branches and selections into view A maximum of three selections can be displayed at one time These keys also allow you to move the cursor one character to the left or right on data entry displays for example to allow entry of one digit at a time F1 F2 F3 Keys Function keys select the LCD choice that appears above the function key they are labeled F1 F2 and F3 If a selection spans more than one function key then any of those keys choose that selection Select Key Model 3911 only The Select key appears on the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier It is used to connect the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Menu Structure The menu tree is a hierarchical structure
72. the Tone DTMF dial modifier Percent is the start and stop dial string command interrupt characters the Originate Access password must be enclosed by these characters abc123 is the 6 alphanumeric character Originate Access password Comma is a pause dial parameter 98005551234 is the phone number 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 17 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Database Table Examples The following examples illustrate possible database tables in which the password type is configured for VF Entry DTE Entry or a combination of VF DTE and VF plus DTE Entry These tables are shown for illustrative purposes only Passwords shown are not representative of good password selections NOTE The Assigned to column is not stored in the modem Table 12 5 is an example of a database table with passwords configured for VF Entry only This type of password is entered within the AT command dial string Table 12 5 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords VF Password Only Index Password Type Assigned to 21 1 VF_Entry Denver office 31 12 VF_Entry Chicago office 41 1212 VF_Entry Dallas office 51 953246 VF_Entry Miami office modem 1 52 46958373 VF_Entry Miami office modem 2 61 32562682 VF_Entry Atlanta office Table 12 6 is an example of a database table with passwords configured for DTE Entry only This type of password is entered via the originating user s
73. the remote modem displays Frmware Upgrade If the download took place over the dial network the modems disconnect when the download is complete If the Single download is unsuccessful RemClone Failed appears on the LCD s top line Attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative VF Thresholds Update The VF Thresholds Update function allows you to set the thresholds that determine the Health and Status alarm conditions for the VF parameters The following thresholds may be edited RSL High RSL Low Sig Noise NonLinear Retrains 15min Signal Quality Near Echo and Far Echo For Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 4 1 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of Chapter 4 Status Branch To access VF Thresh Update from the Control branch make the following selections Control lt LS VF_Thresh_Update A StJtJtJ we 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Press the key until VF_Thresh_Update appears Press any function key to select VF_Thresh_Update VF Thresholds A a Save PEN A w B tJ o Select Edit In the following example the RSL High threshold is changed from 09 dBm to 10 This example demonstrates VF threshold editing and saving With the exception of Signal Quality all VF thresholds may be modified in this manner Signal Quality uses a menu selection with possibl
74. to add the tributary modem to a control modem s poll list This function should be initiated from only one tributary modem at a time To access Add from the Plist branch make the following selections Poll List A Change Add A ae gt Press the key until Add appears Select Add Poll List Add A Command Complete A lt a re r gt The message Command Complete appears on the LCD to indicate that the tributary modem will be added to the control modem s poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key The Acquire function does not appear in Remote mode Acquire allows you to acquire an active poll list consisting of all modems that are one tier downstream A modem will add to its poll list all downstream devices that respond to a poll To access Acquire from the Plist branch make the following selections Poll List A Add Acquire A w j le B 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 6 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Press the key until Acquire appears Select Acquire NOTE If an error message OtherTestActive or Unable To Acquir appears on the second line of the LCD move up one level in the menu tree to clear the message and return to the PList Acquire branch The OtherTestActive message indicates that a test is running whic
75. used to display functions that configure and control local and remote 391x Series modems It is accessed via the DCP and is shown in Appendix A Menu Tree Status Displays the current status of the modem along with the data rate and the error control mode The menu tree contains the following branches Status Used to monitor the current status of the VF line and DTE interface as well as view the identity of the modem Configure Used to change and save the modem s configuration options PList Poll List Used to identify downstream modems in order to support multipoint health and status polling and multipoint link download broadcasting Control Used to control the modem s hardware and software functions Test Used to begin and end various modem tests SubHS Sub Network Health and Status Used to display alarm conditions in downstream modems Call Setup Used to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls as well as store up to 24 telephone numbers in directory locations Talk Data Used to switch the modem between Talk mode the modem is disconnected from the VF line and Data mode the modem is connected to the VF line when dialing via either the DCP or a telephone Security Used to control the modem s dial access security Remote Used to access and control a remote 3900 Series modem Menu tree branches are discussed in Chapters 4 through 13 Functions that appear on th
76. 0 000 322 SDCP LEDS si025 28 555 ekaa i i eane i ieee Dead ETE Dade bees Seeds Se 3 3 Top Level Menu Status 0 0 cece eee een eee 3 4 Common Operational Messages 0 0 0 eee eee eed 3 5 Dial Access Security Messages 00 0 0 c cece ee eee 4 1 Health and Status Messages 0 2 0 0 ce eee 4 2 Backup Status Screens srs sa cee cb ee ess nt ed Ren Se RO RE eRe EEEE See RE EOS 5 1 DTE Interface Configuration Options 00 00 cee eee ees 5 2 DTE Dialer Configuration Options 0 0 00 eee eee eee 5 3 Line Dialer Configuration Options 0 0 e cece eee eens 5 4 Dial Line Configuration Options 0 eee cee eee eee 5 5 Leased Line Configuration Options 0 0 0 cece eee eee nee 5 6 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options 0 0 cece eee eee 5 7 Test Configuration Options 00 0 eee eee ee eee 5 8 Miscellaneous Configuration Options 0 0 c eee eee eee 7 1 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds 0 2 00 cece eee eee eee eens 10 1 Valid Dial Command Modifiers 0 0c ence eee eed 12 1 Edit Password Table Group Options 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 12 2 Set Answer Security Group Options 0 00 cee eee eee 12 3 Set Originate Security Group Options 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 12 4 Security Configuration Options 00 eee eee eee nes 12 5 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords
77. 0 or 2400 bps An ITU T communications standard for modems operating half duplex with synchronous data at 7200 and 9600 bps An ITU T standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 4800 or 9600 bps on switched dial or leased telephone lines An ITU T standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over dial networks PSTN or leased lines at 14 400 12 000 9600 7200 or 4800 bps A modulation that adds the 19 200 bps and 16 800 bps data rates to the V 32bis data rates It is a proprietary modulation not an ITU T standard AnlTU T standard for error control protocol An ITU T standard for data compression An ITU T standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal A character that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data Glossary 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Index Abort test 8 24 8 10 ac power requirements Access from Remote Active Operating configurations 5 1 Active Saved configurations 5 1 address network management 5 50 6 2 alarms DTE and VE 5 19 analog loopback test 8 44 8 10 answer access security 12 24112 4 answering a call auto answer
78. 2minTest The factory setting is Disable 48 Leased Line Carrier On Level Register determines if the modem Configure Edit disconnects if the carrier signal on leased lines falls below 26 dBm or Leased Line 43 dBm Register has the following values 43 dBm 1 26 dBm 2 33 dBm The factory setting is country dependent usually 43 dBm In France the factory setting is 26 dBm in 4 wire operation and 33 dBm in 2 wire operation S49 Buffer Disconnect Delay Register determines how long the modem Configure Edit continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is V42 MNP Buffer commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The factory setting is 10 seconds 51 DTE RL CT140 Register determines if the modem performs a Configure Edit remote digital loopback if it receives a CT140 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 52 DTE LL CT141 Register determines if the modem performs a local Configure Edit analog loopback if it receives a CT141 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 3 6 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Comm
79. 3 13 tables Dial Line 5 3045 32 DTE Dialer 5 1945 24 DTE Interface 5 9115 19 Leased Line 5 3315 38 Line Dialer 5 2545 29 Misc 5 4845 51 Security 12 13 12 15 Test 5 4645 47 V 42 MNP Buffer 5 38 5 45 Configure branch 3 8 5 1 5 4 15 8 Control branch 3 8 7 147 2 CT111 Rate Control 5 18 CTS Control Customer 1 configurations 5 1 Customer 2 configurations 5 1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Index 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems data compression 5 40 MNP5 V 42bis data rate dial line 5 30 forced to VF rate 5 18 leased line data rates See rates DATAKIT 5 16 5 20 default configuration options 2 6 2 8 Diagnostic Connection diagnostic control panel DCP configurations See configuration options description 1 3411 5 3 1 13 2 menu tree 3 8J A 1 JA 3 messages 3 8113 14 4 914 10 operation 2 6 42 7 3 5 3 7 5 5 5 8 12 7 status indicators LEDs 3 3 13 5 dial access security See Security answering a call auto answer 5 25 11 2 manual answer 5 25 10 44 10 7 11 3 backup 2 4 7 6 47 7 10 11 10 54 10 7 B 2 command modifiers 10 8 14 5 14 6 DCP controlled 10 14 10 2 manual dial See Talk Data network connection 2 4 B 44IB 5 stored i number 10 64 10 8 10 91410 10 F 24F 7 dial backup automatic 5 35 Dial Line configuration options group
80. 3900 Series Modems baud Bell 103J Bell 212A bis bisync bit bps broadcast buffer byte Call Setup carrier carrier mounted CCITT channel character character echo circuit pack lock Command mode configuration area configuration option Configure connector A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second This is not necessarily the same as bits per second although the terms are frequently interchanged A standard for 300 bps data transmission A standard for 1200 bps data transmission Latin for twice Used to distinguish the second version of a standard from other versions e g V 32bis Binary synchronous communications An IBM communications protocol that has become an industry standard It uses a defined set of control characters and control character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary coded data between stations in a data communications system Binary digit The smallest unit of information representing a choice between a one or a zero sometimes called mark or space Bits per second Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection A method of transmission The simultaneous transmission to two or more communicating devices A temporary storage area used to compensate for differences in data flow rate when transmitting data from one device to another A sequence of successive bits usually eight handle
81. 3900 Series modem via the Remote branch of the Top Level menu the Remote Access Password must be the same for both modems By following these procedures you learn how to load a factory preset configuration area in this case Sync Leased how to edit a configuration option Remote Access Password and how to save changes to a configuration area Active Saved The shaded key indicates what key to press ae ae A Status Configure A le le la Select Configure from the Top Level menu LdEditAreafrm gt a Activ Operating A a fre cS LdEditAreafrm lt A E A W lejl amp Scroll across the LCD and select the Factory configuration area 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Ld Fact Preset gt A Gee DM lJ Select Sync_Leased Choose Mode A Answer Originate BL LJ Select Answer Choose Function A leat Save ED e a Select Edit Edit StrapGroup gt A DTE_Interface ea ea ie Edit StrapGroup az EE Misc tJ e amp Scroll across the LCD and select the Misc configuration options group 5 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration StrapsWhenDisc gt A Re No_ Change A lt ED fe a gt RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt 400000000 a ri fre
82. 39117 only Busy yellow The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off hook 39117 only Serv yellow The modem is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally 3911 only assigned network SQ yellow The receive telephone line signal is degraded or the modem s data path has been blocked SQ flashes TXD 103 green The modem is receiving data from the DTE to transmit ON equals space RXD 104 green Data is being transferred to the DTE ON equals space RTS 105 green RTS signal is ON CTS 106 green CTS signal is ON DSR 107 green DSR signal is ON 3917 only DTR 108 green The DTE has turned ON DTR or the modem has forced DTR ON LSD 109 green The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the DTE Rate yellow ON The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the data rate it is 3910 only configured for OFF The modem is connected at its configured data rate Front Panel yellow The modem is connected to the carrier s SDCP 3 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 SDCP LEDs Label Color Indicates OK green Power is ON and the modem is capable of operating Alarm red The modem has detected a problem with its operation For example the modem failed a self test BckUp yellow The modem originally configured for leased line operation is now operating
83. 4 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 9 6 kbps tributaries at 9 6 or 7 2 kbps control at 7 2 kbps tributaries at 7 2 or 4 8 kbps control at 4 8 kbps tributaries at 4 8 or 2 4 kbps control at 2 4 kbps tributaries at 2 4 kops Tributary rates will never exceed control rates If tributary and control rates are equal reducing the control rate automatically reduces the tributary rate 2400 V22bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire and 4 wire leased lines 14400 V33 12000 V33 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire half duplex and 4 wire leased lines NOTE It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate NOTE The modem must be in Direct mode before the modulation scheme can be changed from V 32bis to another leased line modulation V 33 V 29 or V 22bis See Err Contrl Mode configuration option for more about Direct mode On leased lines V 42 error control and Buffer mode are only supported by V 32bis An error occurs if the modem is not in Direct mode when the modulation is changed from V 32bis The AT command is S Register S44 n where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 12 12 000 V 33 19 16 800 V 32 terbo 2 12 000 V 32bis 13 9600 V 29 20 19 200 TMp 3 9600 V 32bis 14
84. 5 25 11 2 manual answer 5 25 10 44 10 7 11 3 approvals 1 8 ASCII characters table E 14IE 4 asynchronous character format 5 10 5 11 asynchronous operation 5 15 10 AT commands command list 14 4414 14 configuration option echo 5 21 escape character escape guard time mode 5 24 operating modes result codes 14 34114 4 using commands 2 7 2 8 5 1 Automatic Dial Backup Automatic Dial Standb Automatic Make Busy automatic rate control dial line leased line 5 3f 14 1414 2 Backspace Character backup dial 2 4 7 647 7 10 1 10 5 10 7 B 2 leased 1 2 2 4J 10 1 status 4 7 Backup Line Check 5 38 Bell 103J 212A 5 30 Bisync D Blid Dial Pause Break Buffer Control Break Forces Escape Buffer Disconnect Delay buffer size reduced as nchronous 5 45 busy control 7 5 17 7 Busy Tone Detect cables 2 5 H 1 Call Setup branch 3 8 10 14 10 2 Canadian government requirements 1 7 Carriage Return Character 5 22 Carrier On Level 5 36 clocking Backup TX Clock Source TX Clock Source XTXC Clamps TXC Clone Remote compatibility compression MNP5 V 42bis 5 40 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Model 3911 installation and removal 2 92 12 network interface module NIM 2 2 7 6 service line 7 647 7 configuration options defaults 2 6 2 8 5 1 F 24F 7 quick display
85. 6 DirectMode Sets data length to 6 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the async character length 5 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 1 2 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Asyn Parity Bit None Nxt None Even Odd Mark Space This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Parity Bit Determines the type of asynchronous parity bit The parity of the DTE must match the parity of the modem Parity options include None Even Odd Mark or Space m None No parity bit is used m Even Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is even m Odd Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is odd m Mark Parity bit is always set to 1 Only valid if Async Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 m Space Parity bit is always set to 0 Only valid if Async Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration o
86. 7 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 OIN Q Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Security Entry Wait Time 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec VF Prompt Type 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone DTE Password 1 1 1 1 1 1 Tries DTE Password 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII Termination Character DTE Password 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII Backspace Character Get User ID Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable NMS 000 000 000 000 000 000 Reporting 4 Answer Security No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer Mode 4 Security Security Security Security Security Security Originate Security No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate Mode 4 Security Security Security Security Security Security 2 This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 4 This configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options F 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Sample Configurations This appendix provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 391x Series modems Following each diagram the appropriate configuration options and cables are listed 3
87. 8 devices Shared Diagnostic Unit A circuit card installed in Slot 0 of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier that provides an interface between an optional SDCP or network management system and the devices in the carrier A data transmission channel with a lower signaling rate than the primary channel It is mostly used for modem diagnostics An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time A bay in the carrier into which a circuit card can be installed Internal storage areas that contain information affecting the modem parameters Sub Network Health and Status A display of alarm occurrences in downstream modems A factory preset configuration area containing configuration options most often used in synchronous dial networks Transmission in which the data characters and bits are transmitted at a fixed rate with transmitter and receiver synchronized This eliminates the need for start and stop bits as used in asynchronous transmission and is thus faster and more efficient Time Division Multiplexer A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream by simultaneously sampling the independent data streams and combining these samples to form the high speed stream Trellis Multipoint A proprietary high speed fast poll multipoint modulatio
88. 910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 G 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Point to Point Figure G 1 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications 19200 V32t TX _ gt DTE Sync Cable 1 Cable 2 Leased 3910 A J I 19200 V32t lt TIX 3910 B Cable 2 DTE Sync Cable 1 Figure G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point Configuration Options 3910 A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED G 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Sample Configurations Multipoint Figure G 2 shows a sample configuration for multipoint applications TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems For example one inbound link may be configured for 14 4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for 9 6 kbps The following control tributary rate combinations are allowed control at 19 2 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 14 4 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps contr
89. 98 12 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 12 1 2 of 2 Edit Password Table Group Options m VF plus DTE Indicates that both layers of password entry are used with this index s password This location is configured so that the answering modem sends a prompt for the DTE side password after receiving a valid VF side password This setting requires that the Set Answer Security option be set to VF_ amp _DTE NOTE If the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode is set to VF_ amp _DTE special requirements apply in order to use passwords with their type set to DTE_Entry The originating caller must first enter a valid VF password If the VF password entered is configured in the security database with the type VF_plus_DTE the user is then required to enter a password configured in the database table with the type DTE_Entry Edit PsWd xxxx Nxt f yyyyyyyy or zzzzzz This configuration option does not appear if Password Type is configured for Cleared Edit Password Allows the password associated with this index to be changed m XXXX Indicates the current index location value m yyyyyyyy Indicates the current password value for this index If the Password Type is VF_Entry or VF_plus_DTE then the password value is an 8 digit decimal number E 222272 Indicates the current password value for this index If Password Type is configured for DTE_Entry then the password value is a 6 character alphanumeric number Sav
90. A V 25bis New Line N A N A N A N A N A N A Character 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 F 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 3 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Q Oii o Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Line Dialer Auto Answer 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ring Count Dialer Type Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Dial Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Blind Dial Pause N A N A N A N A N A N A Busy Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Pause Time 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec No Answer 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec Timeout Fast Disconnect Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Line Current Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disconnect 2 gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec Long Space Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disconnect No Carrier 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec Disconnect No Data Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disconnect Auto Make Busy Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 3911 only Make Busy via Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DTR Dial Line Dial Line Rate 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 V32t V 32bis Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Autom
91. A key 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 4 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview DCP Configuration After installing a 391x Series modem its software configuration options must be set using either the diagnostic control panel DCP or the AT command set This chapter describes how to access and use the Configure branch of the Top Level menu via the DCP The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is a work space where you view and change any configuration options straps These configuration options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory Active Operating is a configuration area containing configuration options currently used by the modem When the modem is powered on or when a save is performed the contents of Active Saved are loaded into Active Operating Any changes made using AT commands directly affect this configuration area Active Saved is a read from and write to configuration option area containing the most recently saved changes made to any configuration options In the event of a power cycle or reset the modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile memory Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional read and write changeable configuration areas where you can create and store additional configurations for specific
92. AKIT dial out applications NOTE If LSD Control is set to DTR DiscOff then the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 The AT command for Forced On is amp CO The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp C1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp C2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp C3 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp C4 The AT command for DTR Disconnect OFF is amp C5 5 16 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 1 8 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options TX Clock Source Internal Nxt Internal External RXC_Loop This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Sync Transmit Clock Source Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the analog channel m Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface m External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface m Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface The AT command for Internal is amp X0 The AT command for External is amp X1 The AT command for RXC Loop is amp X2 Bakup_TXClk_Src Interna
93. ARM TEST DIAL MODE BACKUP Figure 3 2 Optional SDCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Optional SDU 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The standalone Model 3910 modem s DCP has 13 light emitting diodes LEDs and the carrier mounted Model 3911 has 16 LEDs These LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 1 LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate model number shown in the table 3917 only Table 3 1 Model 3910 and Model 3911 DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates Pwr green Power has been applied to the modem Alrm red Flashing A major alarm has been detected in a remote 391x Series modem ON A major alarm has been detected in the local modem For Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 4 1 in Chapter 4 Status Branch Diag green The modem is receiving diagnostic communications either a command or a 3910 only status poll Test 142 yellow Flashing The modem is involved in a firmware upgrade Normal operation is not possible ON The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible OFF The modem is not involved in a test or firmware upgrade Dial yellow Flashing The modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network or the modem is in Dial Standby mode ON The modem has established a dial connection OFF A dial connection does not exist RI 125 green A ringing signal is being received
94. ASCI This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and EC Negotiate Buffer is not configured for Disable Error Control Fallback Character This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control fallback character This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link negotiating handshaking sequence by sending this character The modems will connect in Buffer mode no error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to the DTE When comparing incoming characters for a match against the EC fallback character the modem ignores parity The AT command is An where nis a value from 0 to 127 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 41 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 6 4 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Fiw Cntl of DTE CTS_to DTE Nxt CTS to DTE Disable XON XOFF This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of DTE Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE m CTS to DTE Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the DTE should start and stop sending data m Disable The modem cannot co
95. AT Command protocol amp M2 amp Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone number stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns OFF and then ON amp M3 amp Q3 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol The amp M2 and amp Q2 commands disable the use of AT commands and force the modem into Dumb mode The only way to gain control of the modem is via the DCP amp Rn RTS Action Configure Edit amp RO Standard RS232 ee es amp R1 Ignores RTS amp R2 Simulated Control Carrier amp R3 Control Carrier amp Sn DSR Control Configure Edit amp SO Forced On DTE Interface amp S1 Standard RS232 amp S2 Wink When Disconnect amp S3 Follows DTR amp S4 On Early amp S5 Delay to DTE amp Tn Tests Test amp TO Abort Stops any test in progress amp T4 and amp T5 amp T1 Local Analog Loop Configure Edit amp T2 Pattern Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test Tests BERT amp T3 Local Digital Loopback test amp T4 Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T5 Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T6 Remote Digital Loopback test amp T7 Remote Digital Loopback with Pattern amp T8 Local Loopback with Pattern amp T9 Self Test 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 2 8 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command
96. Below 30 dB Retrains 1 to 256 trains 15 trains per 15 minutes Signal Quality Excellent lowest Good Good Fair Poor No Signal highest Near Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm Far Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm 7 16 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Test Branch 8 The Test branch of the Top Level menu allows you to initiate various modem tests Use these tests if you are having data communication problems such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors By the process of elimination you can usually isolate the fault in your system There are six selections under Test Abort Self Self Test Loc Analog Loop Local Analog Loopback Rem Digital Loop Remote Digital Loopback Loc Digital Loop Local Digital Loopback and Pattern The only tests that can operate concurrently on a single modem are Pattern with a Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote Digital Loopback If any test is operating besides the two combinations just mentioned it must be canceled before starting another test The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests If any parameters need to be set refer to Test in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Abort Self Loc_Analog_Loop Rem_Digital_Loop Loc_Digital_Loop Pattern 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 8 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access the Test branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections L
97. C CONTROL LCD AND lt STATUS INDICATORS POWER SUPPLY LEASED 496 14160 03 Figure 1 1 Model 3910 The rear of the modem contains an ON OFF power switch a low voltage dc power connector an 8 pin modular connector LEASED for leased line connection an 8 pin modular connector DIAL for dial line or leased line backup a 4 pin modular connector NMS for network management and a DB 25 S DTE connector 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 1 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Carrier Mounted Model 3911 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem The carrier mounted Model 3911 modem Figure 1 2 is capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation and installs into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier The Model 3911 s faceplate has 16 LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier s optional speaker The Model 3911 modem s rear has two edge card connectors that mount into a connector plate located on the rear of the carrier This connector plate has two DB 25 S connectors one providing an EJA 232 D DTE interface and one for future functionality FACEPLATE Status Pwr Alrm 142 Test O Dial 125 Ri O Busy O Serv 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 O Front Panel Os BACK CONNECTOR PLATE EIA232 V 24 CONNECTOR EIA232 V 24 5 EDGE CARD 98 CONNECTOR x leg gleo 3188 96 GROUNDING 5 TAB FUTURE USE O a oe
98. CD now displays Sav EditArea to 2 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation 6 Press the key until the appropriate configuration area appears on the LCD then press the corresponding function key to select your choice Saving configuration options to the Active Saved configuration area automatically saves them to the Active Operating configuration area The LCD displays Command Complete 7 The modem is now configured with the selected factory template Press the S key to return to the Top Level menu Refer to Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for more information regarding default factory configuration options Using AT Commands When using AT commands the following criteria must be met e Make sure the asynchronous DTE s communication software is configured for 10 bit character format for example 8 data bits no parity and stop bit e Make sure the DTE cable is attached to the DTE connector on the rear of the 391x Series modem and to the correct serial communications port on the asynchronous DTE e Configure the modem for Async Dial Async Leased or UNIX Dial as described earlier in Using the DCP To verify that the modem is connected and functioning properly enter the following TYPE AT PRESS Return Enter The screen displays OK If the modem does not return OK refer to Appendix B Troubleshooting NOTE If the factory preset configuration is something other than Async Dial Async
99. Call Setup Branch A service line is an extra dial line connected to a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier This line is normally shared by up to eight Model 3911 modems installed in either Slots 1 8 or Slots 9 16 However by daisy chaining the service line connector of one Network Interface Module NIM to the service line of another NIM installed in the same carrier you can permit all 16 modems to share one service line The service line can also be extended to other carriers in a cabinet For more information regarding daisy chaining of modems to the service line refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual A service line is ideal for a dial backup of Model 3911 modems operating on leased lines Remember that a service line can back up only one failed leased line at a time To enable Service Line from the Control branch make the following selections Control A o cae A B lell Press the key until Service_Line appears Select Service_Line to switch the modem from its normal dial line to the service line Now when the modem places a call instead of using the dial line the call is placed on the service line To disconnect the modem from the service line and resume normal operation press the A key once and the gt key until DiscServiceLine appears Select DiscServiceLine The call and service line disconnect and the message Command Complete appears on the LCD 7 6 Septe
100. D Control Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Sim _Cntl_Car DTR DiscOFF Line Signal Detect Control LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem It is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect threshold m Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modems carrier signal LSD turns OFF when the carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold Forced On Forces LSD to be ON at all times m Wink When Disconnect LSD is normally forced ON but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect This is used for UNIX DTEs m Follows DTR The state of LSD follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON LSD turns ON When DTR turns OFF LSD turns OFF m Simulated Control Carrier LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V 13 simulated control carrier signaling This is required for hosts that cannot support full duplex operation If LSD Control is set to simulated control carrier then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to Simulated Control Carrier m DTR Disconnect OFF The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is established In this instance DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for LSD to turn ON This setting is required for AT amp T DAT
101. Dialer Type is configured for AT AT Escape Character The escape sequence allows you to move from Data mode to Command mode Use the AT Originate ATO command to return to Data mode The ASCII value of the escape character 43 ASCII can be set to any ASCII value from 0 ASCII to 255 ASCII However the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCII is entered When disabled the call must be disconnected to return to Command mode The AT command is S Register S2 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 The AT command to disable is S Register S2 n where nis a value from 128 to 255 When disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode unless disconnected Escape GuardTim 1sec Nxt 1sec 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Escape Guard Time Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters The AT command is S Register S12 n where nis a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments BreakForceEscap Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Break Forces Escape Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break character from the DTE Disable A break character is sent to the remote end m Enable
102. DownldOnly A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has Download Mode failed The modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which Result only another download attempt is possible Frmware A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was Upgrade successful RemClone A remote cloning of firmware has failed This message appears on Failed the local modem s LCD Firmware Remote Clone A remote cloning of firmware was successful This message Download OK appears on the local modem s LCD Result Cont Beast Clone A broadcast cloning of firmware has completed You must look Done under the Control branch for cloning results This message appears on the local modem s LCD AT Command Reset by AT The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ Reset command command 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Messages listed in Table 3 4 are common operational messages that occur during modem operation These messages normally appear on the second line of the LCD Table 3 4 Common Operational Messages Common Operational Message Indicates Please Wait A command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete Command Sent A command is sent to a remote modem No Rem Response or Remote Modem Fail A remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds Command Complete A command issued to a local or re
103. E_Only VF_ amp _DTE Set Answer Security Is the primary method for enabling or disabling the dial access security function No Answer Security Disables the dial access security feature DTE Only The answering modem is enabled for security The originating user must supply a password when prompted NOTE A call attempt never enters data mode if the answering modem is configured for DTE_Only and the originating caller attempts to enter a password using only the VF side password entry technique NOTE In modem pooling applications where modems are connected to a multiline hunt group rotary all modems must have this configuration option set to the same value m VF amp DTE The answering modem is enabled for security The modems negotiate security using the VF side password entry technique protocol If successful and the Password Type for this particular VF password is set for VF_ amp DTE a password is requested from the originating user If successful the modems connect and can pass data NOTE A call attempt fails if the answering modem is configured for VF_ amp _DTE and the originating caller does not first enter a VF side password 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Set Orig Sec Set Originate Security controls whether or not the modem can originate a call using AT commands when the dial access security feature is installed This method of outbound security only applies to mode
104. HERE 3900 Series Modems NonLnearDist Non Linear Distortion displays distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line This value appears for Trellis Multipoint modulation Retrains Retrains displays the number of retrains over the last 15 minutes of operation The total 15 minute accumulation is updated every minute This value appears for Trellis Multipoint modulation To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the S key Identity Identity displays the modem s serial number model number firmware revision level hardware revision number and firmware part number Retrieval of this information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement modems and or making firmware upgrades To access Identity from the Status branch make the following selection Status A p P A lt ee es cS Press the key until Identity appears Select Identity Status ldentity gt A eee A lt re Fs cS The modem s serial number appears on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll and view the model number firmware revision level hardware part number and firmware part number Ser Serial number is an 8 digit number that identifies the modem Mod Model number is an alphanumeric number that identifies the modem as either a Model 3910 or Model 3911 modem FRev F
105. Hz This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 22bis or V 22 data rate or when V 32bis Automode is configured for Enable V 22bis Guard Tone Determines whether the V 22bis guard tone is disabled set to 550 Hz or set to 1800 Hz Disable No guard tone m 550 Hz or 1800 Hz When the modem is in Answer mode it transmits the guard tone at this frequency NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries The AT command for Disable is amp GO The AT command for 550 Hz is amp G1 The AT command for 1800 Hz is amp G2 V32bis Train Long End Long Short This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Train Controls V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 train time Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used during the V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 handshaking sequence for both dial and 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications m Long Selects long train Use this setting whenever far end frequency offset phase roll may be encountered This is usually only required when transmitting over satellite links m Short Allows the modem to train up faster when using V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 modulation The AT command is S Register S43 n where nis 0 for Long and 1 for Short 5 32 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Leased Line The Leased Line configuration options only ap
106. In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas PRESS Return Enter 2 The selected factory configuration is saved To establish a connection with a remote modem use the D Dial command Refer to Chapter 14 AT Commands and S Registers for more on AT commands 2 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation Removing and Replacing Model 3910 Modems To remove and replace a Model 3910 modem perform the following steps 1 Make sure the modem is offline and press the modem s rear panel power switch to the OFF position 2 Disconnect the power cord from the ac power outlet and then disconnect the dc power cable from the connector on the rear of the modem 3 Disconnect the leased line and dial modular cords from the modem s rear panel 4 Disconnect the DTE interface cable from the modem s rear panel If the modem is to be removed for service return it to the company using the procedures described in Government Requirements and Equipment Return in Chapter 1 Introduction 5 Install the replacement modem as described in Model 3910 Modem Installation on page 2 2 and configure it the same way as the modem being replaced Model 3911 Modem Installation CAUTION If the Model 3911 is removed from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3911 in an antistatic
107. J le l amp If the correct value is entered the EditPassWdTable group appears on the LCD 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems EditPasswdTable Select Index Press the key to scroll the Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password groups into view If an incorrect administrative password is entered then the message PassWrd Invalid appears as well as the last password entered Enter the correct password value or press the A or A key to exit the Security branch The Password Table is the modem s security database It contains all essential information for each password stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory The information associated with each password is known as a record Records are identified by an index which is a numeric name for a single record A password s record is retrieved by entering its index The Edit Password Table group allows you to view and or change the modem s security database table To do this you must retrieve a password s records by selecting its index Refer to the Select Index section The Edit Password Table group consists of the following options Select Index Password Type Edit Password and Save Edit To access EditPasswdTable from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Set Access Ctrl gt A Eee A m l M le we Select EditPassWdTable Select Index allows a specific re
108. Leased or UNIX Dial you do not have AT command control To regain AT command control select via the DCP the Async Dial factory preset configuration as described in Using the DCP on page 2 6 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 2 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To change a factory template using AT commands perform the following steps For more information on changing factory templates using AT commands refer to Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers 1 Use the AT amp F amp W command to load the appropriate factory configuration to the appropriate storage area Enter the following TYPE AT amp Fy amp Wn Where y is one of the following Factory configurations 0 for Async Dial 1 for Sync Dial 2 for Sync Leased Answer 3 for UNIX Dial 4 for Sync Leased Originate 5 for Async Leased Answer 6 for Async Leased Originate 7 for TMp Control 8 for TMp Trib NOTE Only amp FO amp F3 amp F5 and amp F6 allow you to use AT commands after saving a factory configuration Any other selection removes AT command control The only way to return to AT command control is through the DCP as described in Using the DCP on page 2 6 Where n is one of the following storage areas 0 for Active Saved 1 for Customer 1 2 for Customer 2 NOTE These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options
109. M Q N CIRCUIT CARD GUIDES 493 131434 Figure 2 2 Installing a Model 3911 Modem 2 At the front of the carrier hold the modem vertically with the latch on its faceplate in the open position and insert it into the top and bottom card guides of one of the slots numbered 1 16 Figure 2 2 Slide the modem into the slot aligning the modem with the rear connector plate until the backplane connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the back of the carrier The faceplate latch automatically closes as you push the modem into the carrier To lock the modem into the carrier press the faceplate latch until a click is heard 3 Ifthe carrier is ON the Power LED on the faceplate of the 3911 lights After several seconds the modem completes its power up self test in which all faceplate LEDs light Return to the rear of the carrier and tighten the rear connector plate If the modem is to communicate with an installed SDCP install the modem as described above and perform the following steps 1 Press the Select key on the SDCP The cursor appears in the carrier selection entry 2 Press the F1 f or F2 key until the carrier number you want appears on the LCD The carrier number selection has a range of 1 to 8 since a single SDCP can control a configuration of up to eight carriers This is only possible if the SDU is installed 3 Press the key to position the cursor on the slot selection en
110. MSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 9 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options CT111_Rate Cntl Disable Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2 CT111 Rate Control Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface m Disable Disregards CT111 Rate Control m Fallback Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT111 is OFF Valid only for V 32bis V 33 V 29 modulation Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate Fallback2 Not available for TMp tributaries Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate NOTE This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options The AT command is S Register S61 n where nis 0 for Disable 1 for Fallback1 and 2 for Fallback2 DTE_Rate VF Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option does not appear if Async Sync is configured for Sync DTE Rate VF Forces the DTE s data rate to be equal to the VF telephone line data rate m Disable The data rate of the connection between the
111. Mp Control amp F8 TMp Trib Only the amp F0 and amp F3 commands will leave you in AT Command mode The other commands will take you out of AT command control and place the modem into Dumb mode The only way to return to AT command control is via the diagnostic control panel DCP amp Gn V 22bis Guard Tone Configure Edit amp GO Disable Piakin amp G1 550 Hz amp G2 1800 Hz NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries amp In Dial Transmit Level Configure Edit The AT command is amp In where nis Dial Line 0 for 1 dBm 1 for 1 dBm e e e 32 for 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm This command is disabled in some countries it answers OK but does not change the level amp Ln Leased Mode Configure Edit amp LO Disables leased line operation Leased Line amp L1 2 wire originate leased line operation amp L2 4 wire originate leased line operation amp L3 2 wire answer leased line operation amp L4 4 wire answer leased line operation 14 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 7 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Mn and Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type Configure Edit San amp M0 amp Q0 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode and uses AT pleat Command protocol amp M1 amp Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses
112. NS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA Cc September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Table of Contents Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions 0 How to Use this Manual 0 cee eee eee Related Documents 0 0 eee cee eens Ordering Information 0 00 cece eee eee ees 1 Introduction OVERVICW init sci bie e pope a bis Gin Btn Se thas Geena eth ee pete Gea Features nnt4 0b kxck ie heb ie oe Sos a wea Slee oes Raed Multipoint Applications esse 0 0 eee eee eee Leased Backup Applications 0 00 0 0c eee eee COMSPHERE 391x Series Models 0 000005 Government Requirements and Equipment Return Technical Specifications 0 0 cece eee eee eee 2 Modem Installation OVEIVICW pice uci hehe ne e oa baked a aieede Pasi E 391x Series Modem Package 0 0 00 e eee eee eee Model 3910 Modem Installation 00 0 IDLE Connection i604 03004 hoe eeste eae tegen these vaade oe Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Dial Network Connection 0 0 00 cee eee eee eee Model 3910 Dial Backup Connection 00 Model 3910 Leased Backup Connection Network Management System Connection Power Supply Connection 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee Mod
113. NX Call Failure Indication CFI The CFI response is issued to the DTE if the modem fails a CRN or CRS command CFI is similar to the AT result codes BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE and ERROR The CFI response format is CFIxx Where Xx is ET is Engaged tone NS is Number not stored CB is Local DCE busy RT is Time out on ring tone AB is Abort call on time out NT is Answer tone not detected FC is Forbidden call ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages Busy Signal and Trunk Busy and the result code BUSY NS is similar to the Common Operational Message Invalid Number and the result code ERROR CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages Dial Line in Use and No Dial Test and the result code ERROR RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer Tone and the result code NO CARRIER AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages No Dial Tone and No Dial DTR and the result code NO DIALTONE and ERROR NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet Answer and the result code NO ANSWER Call Connecting CNX The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem has connected to the remote modem CNX is similar to the AT result code CONNECT The CNX response format is CNX D 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ITU T V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses Delayed Call Indicator The DLC response is issued to the DTE if the modem is not currently allowed to call the number DLC is similar to the AT result
114. O The AT command for Words format is V1 The AT command for Numbers 2 is V2 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 23 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 2 5 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options AT Cmnd Mode Normal Nxt Normal No_ERROR NoStrapOrERR This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT AT Command Mode Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands Normal Allows normal operation of the AT command set The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues the ERROR result code for invalid commands If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands m No ERROR Operates similar to Normal mode however the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid commands When an invalid command is encountered the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands m No Strap or ERROR Ignores all AT commands including valid commands that cause a configuration option to change Only non configuring commands for example ATD ATA and ATI are executed the ERROR result code is never returned NOTE Since this configuration option affects AT commands it cannot be changed by the AT amp F command However it can be
115. ON condition while an underscore _ indicates a Mark or OFF condition To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key The Status Backup function displays the configuration of the modem s current operating line facility and the configuration and condition of the inactive line NOTE The modem s rear panel has two line interface jacks LEASE and DIAL see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 Modem Installation The jack labeled LEASE is the APL primary interface and accepts either 2 wire or 4 wire APL The jack labeled DIAL is the backup interface and accepts either 2 wire APL Dual Lease Line or Dial lines 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Backup from the Status branch make the following selection Press the key until Backup appears Status A Be Sse A trjJlel W Select Backup Status Backup gt A Line Pri 4w APL A lt a re r gt The configuration of the current operating line facility either APL primary or backup appears Refer to Table 4 2 Press the gt key to display the next screen Status Backup lt A Eee A m la le a we This screen displays the configuration and condition of the inactive line facility either APL primary or backup There are four condition codes Good Bad
116. ONNECT xxxx xxxx VF data rate appear along with result codes listed in Table 14 1 in Chapter 14 Disable Only OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER and ERROR result codes appear Add EC Places the EC suffix after the result code text if error control is used For example CONNECT 9600 EC Add V 42 or MNP Places either the V 42 or MNP suffix after the result code text if data compression is used For example CONNECT 9600 V42b Use DTE Rate Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate This feature is required in some modem pooling applications NOTE NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled BUSY appears if Busy Detect configuration option is enabled The AT command for Disable is XO The AT commands for Enable are X1 X2 X3 or X4 The AT command for Add EC is X5 The AT command for Add V42 MNP is X6 The AT command for Use DTE Rate is X7 ResultCode Form Words Nxt Words Numbers 1 Numbers 2 This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Format Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes Some DTEs do not recognize Result Codes as words therefore numbers are required The Numbers 2 format is required for some modem pooling applications For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 14 1 in Chapter 14 AT Commands and S Registers The AT command for Numbers 1 is V
117. Register S65 n where n is 0 for Enable gt 8 msec 1 for Enable gt 90 msec and 2 for Disable Long Space Disc Enable Nxt Enable Disable Long Space Disconnect Determines the modem s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote modem before it goes on hook Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call m Enable Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE For modulations lower than 4800 bps the modem s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect m Disable Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE Modem will not transmit a long space disconnect The AT command for Disable is YO The AT command for Enable is Y1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 27 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 3 4 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options No Carrier Disc 2sec Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec No Carrier Disconnect If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem it disconnects the call This configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects Loss of carrier is one method of disconnecting a call m 2 5 10 20 sec Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds or 20 seconds m Disable Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries
118. Return key Answer A Answer Mode Goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection None without waiting for a ring Dn Dial Begins the dialing sequence The dial string n modifiers and None telephone number is entered after the D command Any digit 0 9 or may be dialed as a DTMF tone Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode The following example shows how to dial through a PBX The dial string consists of the command string and the telephone number ATD9W5551234 Modifiers include the following parameters T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option j Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by value held in S Register S8 WwW Wait for dial tone The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX For example 9W 555 6789 R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an an
119. S90 DTE Rate VF Register allows the DTE s data rate to be equal to the VF telephone line data rate If Enabled the data rate between the DTE and modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface S92 V 29 Train On Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Leased 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 25 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 3 12 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 93 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased 94 V29 Link Configuration Selects point to point or multipoint operation Register
120. TION 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR SUB MINIATURE PLUG FOR 4 CONDUCTOR PERMISSIVE PLUG FOR DIAL NETWORK NETWORK OPERATION LJ MANAGEMENT OPERATION POWER SUPPLY NOTE v THE DIAL JACK IS ALSO USED FOR 2 WIRE LEASED BACKUP Figure 2 1 Model 3910 Rear Panel and Power Supply 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 2 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems DTE Connection Use the following procedures to connect the EIA 232 D cable from the modem to the DTE 1 Make sure the modem s rear panel power switch is OFF 2 Connect the DB 25 P plug connector on the cable to the DB 25 S socket connector labeled DTE Figure 2 1 on the modem s rear panel Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the modem 3 Connect the DB 25 P connector on the cable to the DB 25 S connector on the DTE Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the DTE Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Use the following procedures to connect a Model 3910 to the leased line network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled LEASED Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface Dial Network Connection The telephone company provides the line termination jacks for the permissive service you request Advance coordination with the telephone company is suggested when connecting the modem to telephone dial lines PSTN In the Permissive mode the m
121. The 391x Series modems unique software defineability allows for the addition of future enhancements whether it is installing new features or firmware upgrades The modem s compatibility with a number of dialing methods and protocols such as asynchronous AT commands ITU T V 25bis dialing and the user friendly diagnostic control panel DCP permits the 391x Series modem to be used in a variety of applications and environments while also allowing control over modem configuration dialing and diagnostics The 391x Series modems offer preset factory configurations containing the most often used modem settings The 391x Series modems have a wide variety of features Four wire two wire point to point or four wire multipoint operation Four wire two wire leased line modulations V 32terbo 19200 and 16800 bps V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps Trellis Multipoint 19200 14400 9600 7200 4800 and 2400 bps V 22bis 2400 bps V 27bis 4800 and 2400 bps V 33 14400 and 12000 bps and V 29 9600 7200 and 4800 bps Dial line modulations V 32terbo 19200 and 16800 bps V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps V 22bis 2400 bps V 22 1200 bps V 23 1200 and 600 bps V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps and Bell 103J 300 bps Channel adaptive Trell
122. a basic understanding of modems and their operation his Manual 1 provides technical specifications information about the 391x Series modems features and the government requirements for using these modems r l a 2 go et a a Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing the 391x Series modems Q hapter 3 provides the information required to operate the Model 3910 using the diagnostic control panel DCP and the Model 3911 using the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s shared diagnostic control panel SDCP shows how to use the Status branch of the front panel menu to monitor the status of the modem and view identity information Q a D uc et O aN Chapter 5 provides the information required to set configuration options in the 391x Series modems using the modem s diagnostic control panel Chapter 6 Hescribes the Poll List Branch of the DCP menu Q g D ge gm a N describes the Control Branch 8 describes the Test Branch describes the Sub Network Health and Status Branch ajo Ss S iI er g oO oO ia O Chapter 10 flescribes the Call Setup Branch Chapter 11 describes the Talk Data Branch Chapter 12 provides instructions for using the Dial Access Security feature Chapter 13 describes how to control a remote modem using the Remote Branch Chapter 14 provides instructions for displaying and changing AT commands and S Registers Appendix A provides a menu tree
123. able Overview Table E 1 in this appendix provides the ASCII character table Table E 1 1 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 00 000 NUL CTRL 01 001 SCH CTRL A 02 002 STX CTRL B 03 003 EXT CTRL C 04 004 EOT CTRL D 05 005 ENQ CTRL E 06 006 ACK CTRL F 07 007 BEL CTRL G 08 008 BS CTRL H 09 009 HT CTRL I 0A 010 LF CTRL J 0B 011 VT CTRL K 0C 012 FF CTRL L 0D 013 CR CTRL M 0E 014 SO CTRL N OF 015 SI CTRL O 10 016 DLE CTRL P 11 017 DC1 CTRL Q 12 018 DC2 CTRL R 13 019 DC3 CTRL S 14 020 DC4 CTRL T 15 021 NAK CTRL U 16 022 SYN CTRL V 17 023 ETB CTRL W 18 024 CAN CTRL X 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table E 1 2 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 19 025 EM CTRL Y 1A 026 SUM CTRL Z 1B 027 ESC CTRL 1C 028 FS CTRL 1D 029 GS CTRL 1E 030 RS CTRL Ax 1F 031 US CTRL _ 20 032 spacebar 21 033 22 034 23 035 24 036 25 037 26 038 amp 27 039 f 28 040 29 041 2A 042 2B 043 2C 044 2D 045 2E 046 2F 047 30 048 0 31 049 1 32 050 2 33 051 3 34 052 4 35 053 5 36 054 6 37 055 7 38 056 8 39 057 9 3A 058 3B 059 3C 060 lt
124. abled using the Q1 command Table 14 1 lists all available result codes with numeric and word equivalents 14 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Result Codes Table 14 1 lists all valid result codes for the 391x Series modem Table 14 1 1 of 2 Result Codes a saa ag Word Description 0 0 OK Command executed 1 1 CONNECT Modem connected to line 2 2 RING Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line 3 3 NO CARRIER Modem lost carrier signal does not detect carrier signal or does not detect answer tone 4 4 ERROR Invalid command 5 5 CONNECT 1200 Connection at 1200 bps 6 6 NO DIALTONE No dial tone detected 7 7 BUSY Busy or trunk busy signal detected 8 8 NO ANSWER No quiet answer 10 10 CONNECT 2400 Connection at 2400 bps 11 11 CONNECT 4800 Connection at 4800 bps 12 12 CONNECT 9600 Connection at 9600 bps 13 16 CONNECT 12000 Connection at 12 000 bps 14 13 CONNECT 14400 Connection at 14 400 bps 15 14 CONNECT 19200 Connection at 19 200 bps 16 15 CONNECT 7200 Connection at 7200 bps 17 17 CONNECT 16800 Connection at 16 800 bps 19 19 CONNECT 300 Connection at 300 bps 20 10 CONNECT 2400 EC Connection at 2400 bps with error control 21 11 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 22 12 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 23 16 CONNECT 12000 EC Connecti
125. al Sets the modem for tone dial mode Configure Edit Line Dialer Vn Result Codes Format Configure Edit DTE Dialer VO Displays result codes in Number 1 format digits V1 Displays result codes as text V2 Displays result codes in Number 2 format digits 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 2 4 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Xn Extended Result Code Dial Tone Detect and Busy Tone Detect Extended Configuration Options Result Code P Configure Edit Extended Dial Tone Busy Tone i Result Code Detect Detect DTE Dialer ae Dial Tone X0 Disable Disable isable X1 Enable Disable Disable Detect f x2 Enable Enable Disable Configure Edit X3 Enable Disable Enable Line Dialer X4 Enable Enable Enable x5 Add EC Enable Enable Busy Tone X6 Add V42 MNP Enable Enable Detect X7 Use DTE Rate Enable Enable Configure Edit Line Dialer Extended Result Code Enable Displays all result codes listed in Table 14 1 except for error control suffix Disable Only displays OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Add EC Displays result codes with EC suffix Add V42 MNP Displays result codes with V 42 or MNP suffix Use DTE Rate Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate Dial Tone Detect Enable Sets the modem for dial tone detect Disable Sets the modem for blind dialing NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dia
126. and Sequence 53 V 54 Address Identifies the address of the modem to be placed ina Configure Edit loopback test Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 34 Modem address The factory setting is Disable 54 V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in Configure Edit the network Tests Register has the following values 0 Peripheral 1 Intermediate The factory setting is Peripheral 55 Access From Remote Register determines if a modem s DCP can be Configure Edit accessed by a remote modem Misc Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S56 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the first pair Configure Edit leftmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to Misc 99 is valid For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then S56 1 and 2 S57 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the second pair of Configure Edit digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc S58 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the third pair of Configure Edit digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc S59 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the fourth pair Configure Edit rightmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 Misc to 99 is valid 14 20 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers
127. andard Code for Information Interchange The standard for data transmission over telephone lines A 7 bit code establishes compatibility between data services The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in asynchronous dial networks Data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a character five to eight bits and one or more stop bits at the end The idle state prior to the device establishing a successful connection with a remote device It is from the AT Command mode that AT Commands are issued Several AT commands issued at once The string is preceded by an AT prefix The group of commands used to control and configure a device through a DTE such as a personal computer The commands must begin with the characters AT and end with a carriage return A prefix issued before AT commands that identifies the DTE s data rate parity and character length The mode in which the device automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line A feature which allows modems to adjust their signaling rate based on current line conditions A common bus at the rear of a nest or chassis that provides communications and power to circuit card slots 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Glossary 1 COMSPHERE
128. appear on the Top Level display It is not necessary to specify an originating or answering modem when dialing via the DCP because the answering modem detects that it is receiving a ringing voltage and automatically defaults to Answer mode 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 11 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 11 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Dial Access Security NOTE This chapter supports the operation of dial access security for the COMSPHERE 391x Series modems This chapter is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of dial access security operation Although the security functions described in this chapter are designed to prevent unwanted user access to your network the company recognizes that no security system is infallible Dial Access Security is a feature that allows you to control who has access to your COMSPHERE 391x Series modem and ultimately your host DTE To take advantage of this security feature you must create a database of passwords which are stored in the modem s nonvolatile memory The Model 3910 can store a maximum of 20 passwords while the Model 3911 can store up to 3000 passwords Control of security functions is established in the Security Configuration Options group which is located in the Configuration branch of the Top Level menu These areas are described in the Security Branch and Security Configurati
129. aracter will enable data transmission Also the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop the flow of data to process it The AT Command for Disable is GO The AT Command for Enable is G1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 43 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 6 6 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Break Buffr Ctl Keep_Data Nxt Keep Data Discard_Data This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Break Buffer Control Determines if data stored in the modem s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a break sequence Keep Data Nondestructive mode Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems Discard Data Destructive mode Empties the data buffer Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break are discarded NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Discard Data are KO and K1 The AT commands for Keep Data are K2 K3 K4 and K5 Send Break Cntl Data_First End Data_First Break_First This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Asyn
130. ased Transmit 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm N A N A N A Level 3 Auto Dial Backup Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Auto Dial Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Standby Special Standby Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Dial Standby 10 min 10 min 10 min N A N A N A Time Carrier On Level 43 dBm 43 dBm 26 dBm TMp N A N A N A Control or 43 dBm TMp Tributary V 27bis Train N A N A N A N A N A N A V 29 Train on N A N A N A N A N A N A Data V 29 Retrain N A N A N A N A N A N A V 29 Link N A N A N A N A N A N A Configuration TMp Train Time N A N A 50 N A N A N A TMp Tx N A N A Enable N A N A N A Preemphasis Lease Lookback Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Dual Leased Line Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Backup Line Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Check 1 This configuration option is country dependent 3 Except in North America this configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 F 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 5 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 OS Q Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings V 42 MNP Buffer Error Control N A Direct V 42 MNP or N A Direct V 42 MNP or V 42 MNP or N A Direct Mode Buffer Buffer Buffer V 42bis Data N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Compress
131. at the Chicago Dallas and Miami offices are required to enter a DTE password after the VF password is entered via the AT dial command 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 12 20 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security NOTE This page is self supporting and can be removed for security reasons 00282600 Dial Access Security To clear the dial access security alarm light from the modem s front panel do the following 3 4 Press the key to return to the Top Level menu Press F1 to access the Status branch Press F1 again to select DeviceHs Press F3 to select Security From the Security branch press F1 twenty 20 times The security alarm light clears 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 12 22 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Remote Branch 3 The Remote branch of the Top Level menu allows you to control the remote modem s DCP using the local modem s DCP This function allows you to change configuration options and control test functions in a remote modem Any changes made to configuration options while using the Remote branch are not saved until you exit the Remote branch This function is only available when using either V 32terbo V 32bis V 32 TMp V 33 or V 29 modulation schemes Cho
132. ay NOTE When the modem is configured for Dial Only there is no backup NOTE The leased line interface is disabled when the factory default options are loaded from the Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial templates Line No Sync No second screen display NOTE No Sync appears when the modem is not trained on either the primary or backup line facility To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Options The Options Status function displays all optional firmware features currently installed in the modem If no firmware options are installed None_Installed appears on the LCD To access Options from the Status branch make the following sections Status A BS E A lt a re ey cS Press the key until Options appears Select Options Catone stats gt A v 29 v 33 LA lt a re r gt If optional features are installed in the modem they appear on the LCD s bottom line If other features are installed press the gt key to scroll other features into view To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key Record Record is a troubleshooting tool used by the end user in conjunction with support personnel This fu
133. c and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Send Break Control Determines what is sent from the modem first data or break if a break sequence is sent from the DTE Data First Nonexpedited A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received This is also Known as Nonexpedited mode Break First Expedited A break is sent before the data currently in the buffer This is also known as Expedited mode NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Break First are KO K1 K2 and K3 The AT commands for Data First are K4 and K5 5 44 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 6 7 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options BuffrDiscDelay 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 60sec This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Buffer Disconnect Delay Determines how long the modem continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE This also applies to the modem s receiving buffers when it is commanded to disconnect from a remote modem or DTE Disable Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers m 10 60 sec Maximum amount of
134. c shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 B COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Notices WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THE DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N EMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DA
135. cations Description DATA RATES Leased Line 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 bps Dial Line 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 600 300 bps ERROR CONTROL ITU T V 42 MNP 4 2 DATA COMPRESSION ITU T V 42bis MNP Class 5 1 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation Overview This chapter provides a list of equipment supplied with the modem as well as a list of customer supplied equipment In addition it describes how to install and remove the 391x Series modem and how to select a factory preset configuration using either the DCP or the AT command set 391x Series Modem Package After opening the modem s package check for damage and verify that the following items are present For the standalone model e Installation instructions e Model 3910 modem e Power supply e One 6 position 4 wire modular cord e One 8 position 8 wire modular cord in selected models For the carrier mounted model e Installation instructions e Model 3911 modem e Rear connector plate with two DB 25 S edge card connectors If any hardware components are damaged notify your service representative Return equipment using the procedures described in Government Requirements and Equipment Return in Chapter 1 Introduction 3910 A2 GN32 41 February 2002 2 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Customer Supplied Equipment The following customer supplied equipment is required to compl
136. changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP The AT command is S Register S84 n where nis 0 or 231 for Normal 1 or 232 for No ERROR and 2 or 233 for No Strap or ERROR V25bis Coding ASCII Nxt ASCII EBCDIC This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC or V 25bis Bsync V 25bis Coding Identifies to the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V 25bis commands The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding The AT command is S Register S62 n where nis O for ASCII or 1 for EBCDIC V25bis IdleFill Mark Nxt Mark Flag This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC or V 25bis Bsync V 25bis Idle Fill Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE The modem responds to the DTE using the same idle fill The AT command is S Register S63 n where nis 0 for Mark or 1 for Flag V25b NewLineChr CR LF End CR LF CR LF This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25 bis Async V 25bis New Line Character Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V 25bis Async mode The modem responds to the DTE using the same line terminator The AT command is S Register S64 n where n is 0 for carriage return and line feed 1 for carriage return or 2 for line feed 5 24 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration
137. code DELAYED The DLC response format is DLCn Where n is the delay in minutes before the number can be called Call Answer Commands Call Answer commands disable or enable the modem s AutoAnswer function These commands are issued from the DTE Call Answer commands include Incoming Call INC Disregard Incoming Call DIC and Connect Incoming Call CIC Incoming Call INC The INC response informs the DTE that the modem has detected a ring tone At this point the DTE can issue the DIC command to disable the modem from answering the call INC is similar to the AT result code RING Disregard Incoming Call DIC The DIC command prevents the modem from answering an incoming call This command is only valid once the DTE receives an incoming call INC response from the modem A DIC must be issued within 5 seconds after receiving an INC The DIC command format is DIC If DIC is issued within 5 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If DIC is issued after 5 seconds INV is returned Connect Incoming Call CIC The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any DIC commands and answer an incoming call This command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC command CIC must be issued within 10 seconds after sending a DIC CIC is similar to the ATA command The CIC command format is CIC If CIC is issued within 10 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If CIC is issued after 10 seconds INV is returne
138. condary channel NOTE When initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem primary channel operation is not available Also if the tributary modem is not on the control modem s poll list the error message No Trib Session appears when the function is executed To access the Remote branch make the following selections Leased 19 2 lt A EA Remote AN w l le W Press the key until Remote appears Select Remote NOTE If a connection is not established between a local 3900 Series modem and a remote 3900 Series modem the LCD displays Remote Mode Fail No Circuit Return to the Top Level menu 13 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Remote Branch For Trellis Multipoint TMp control modems you must specify the network management address of a tributary modem The following display does not appear in point to point or Trellis Multipoint tributary modems Choose Address A E TXXX A B Je amp The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt 1 and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 ft key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote functio
139. configuration option settings The AT command for Low is LO or L1 The AT command for Medium is L2 The AT command for High is L3 Access frm Remt Enable Nxt Enable Disable Access from Remote Determines if your modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line CAUTION If this configuration option is disabled the modem cannot be accessed by another modem m Enable Allows access from a remote modem m Disable Does not allow access from a remote modem NOTE The remote modem must be a 3900 Series modem The AT command is S Register S55 n where nis 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable RemAccssPasswrd 00000000 Nxt t 00000000 Remote Access Password Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a local modem The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem CAUTION A remote access password should be selected for security purposes NOTE If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable the password has no effect The AT command equivalent is S Registers S56 n S57 x S58 y and S59 z where nis the leftmost pair of digits x is the second pair of digits y is the third pair of digits and zis the rightmost pair or fourth pair of digits For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then the value for S56 is 1 and 2 and the value for S59 is 7 and 8 Dir 1_ Callback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Directory Location 1 Cal
140. cord to be retrieved Index addresses range from 0001 to 0020 for the Model 3910 and from 0001 to 3000 for the Model 3911 The contents of this record can be viewed edited and saved To access Select Index make the following selections Set Access Ctrl gt A EditPassWdTable A SF IOS Select EditPassWdTable Select Index CA Ent 0001 Bess lt a re gt 12 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Select Index appears Press the F2 ft key to increment index values Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the desired index appears and then select Ent If an index outside of the range is entered the message Index Too Big appears Choose an index from the database s current index range After selecting an index the Edit Password Table group s options Password Type Edit Password and Save Edit appear in a series of LCD displays Keep the following in mind when scrolling down Edit Password Table e The current function and index appear on the LCD s top line e The LCD s bottom line displays Nxt and all selections available for the displayed security option e Nxt indicates that more options are available by scrolling down It also indicates that the value displayed on the LCD is the current setting e Use the lt and keys to move selections into view e Use the F2 and F3 keys to choo
141. d 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 D 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Program Normal PRN The Program Normal PRN command allows the DTE to enter and store a telephone number to a specific directory location PRN is similar to the AT amp Z command The PRN command format is PRNx n Where x is the directory location 1 24 n is the telephone number Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD The Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD command displays telephone numbers that are currently delayed as a result of failed call attempts All the numbers currently delayed are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLD command format is RLD Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF The Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF command displays telephone numbers that are forbidden as a result of failed call attempts All the numbers forbidden are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLF command format is RLF Request List of Stored Numbers RLN The Request List of Stored Numbers RLN command displays telephone numbers stored in the modem s directory location If the RLN command is entered without specifying a directory location then all directory locations and telephone numbers appear If a directory location is entered then only that telephone number appears The RLN command format is RLN which displays all directory locations or RLNx Where x
142. d Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Call the answering modem with a handset and verify that the modem s answer tone is transmitted The modem does not switch Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled Refer back to leased line operation to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration B 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Troubleshooting Table B 4 Modem DTE Connection Symptom Action The modem does not accept or echo back AT commands Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a standard RS 232 cable Null modem cables also known as crossover cables do not work in this application Verify that the Command Character Echo configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all configuration options are returned to their proper setting Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return Verify that the Carriage Return Character configuration option matches what is used by the DTE Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Verify that the DTE has a valid character f
143. d as a unit in data transmission Top Level menu branch that contains all the functions necessary to dial telephone numbers stored in directory locations answer incoming calls disconnect calls and save telephone numbers to directory locations A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains information to be transmitted A device that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and used at central site operations Up to 16 devices can be installed per carrier with six carriers per cabinet Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony An advisory committee established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies It was renamed ITU in March 1993 A bidirectional voice or data path for electrical transmission between two or more points Also called a circuit line link path or facility A letter figure number punctuation or other symbol A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by sending displaying all the characters being transmitted to the monitor A screw lock tab installed over a circuit card s latch release tab to prevent the unit from being removed without a tool One of two modem operating modes When in Command mode the modem accepts commands instead of transmitting or receiving data One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings Configuration areas include Active Operating
144. d mode from Data mode The asynchronous character format for the AT command set must be one of the following 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 data bits parity 1 stop bit parity can be odd even mark or space All commands except A and must begin with the characters AT and end by pressing the Enter key The AT or at prefix clears the command buffer and matches the modem speed and parity to that of the DTE Commands can be upper or lowercase but the modem will not recognize mixed case prefixes At or aT Commands can be entered one at a time or in strings Strings can have up to 40 characters after the AT prefix You can use spaces hyphens and parentheses _ as fillers to make the commands easier to read the modem ignores these fillers and they are not counted among the characters which make up the command string Commands must be entered on one line and end with the carriage return character Enter key Commands with the suffix n have several options associated with them For example in the Ln command L1 sets the speaker volume to Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High If no value is entered for the n suffix the modem assumes a zero 0 value The A command without pressing the Enter key causes the modem to repeat the last command entered Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or word result codes unless the result codes have been dis
145. d the entry is successful the Top Level menu of the remote modem appears on the local modem s LCD An J appears in the upper right hand corner indicating that what is displayed on your LCD is actually the Top Level menu of the remote 391x Series modem If the message Remote FP Busy appears the remote modem s front panel is already in Remote mode The Top Level menu of the remote 391x Series modem is similar to the local 391x Series modem with the following exceptions e The Talk Data and Security branches do not appear e Change Directory is the only function available under the Call Setup branch e Local Analog Loop and Remote Digital Loop do not appear under the Test branch when using the secondary channel When using the primary channel the Test branch does not appear e Poll List Display is the only function available under the PList branch e Exit Remote replaces Remote on the local modem s LCD To return to local modem operation select ExitRem Any changes made to configuration options in the remote modem are saved The following conditions can cause Remote branch access to fail e The local modem is not able to communicate with the remote modem because of a poor dial network or leased line connection or the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem If this is the case the status message No Response appears on the LCD e Ifa connection is established but the remote modem s Access from Remote configuration option is
146. d to manually generate DTMF tones for the phone number and password After the answering modem accepts the password and generates an answerback tone the originating caller places the modem in Data mode and hangs up the phone 12 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security The following examples illustrate two ways to enter a VF side password ATDP5551234TW12345678 or ATDT555 1234 12345678 Where ATD is the AT dial command P and T are the Pulse dial and Tone DTMF dial modifiers 5551234 is the phone number W or is the VF Prompt Tone option setting for second dial tone or quiet answer 12345678 is the VF side password is the password termination character NOTE While pulse dial can be used to originate the call DTMF tones must be used for the password This can be accomplished by using the P and T modifiers appropriately Refer to the Dial command in Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers for more on modifiers This method of password entry requires that the answering modem be a 3900 Series modem Of course the 3900 Series modem must be configured for VF side password entry and the originating user must know the correct VF side password The originating modem can be another 3900 Series modem or any vendor s modem DTE Side Passwords DTE side password entry requires the originating user to supply a valid password via the DTE This method of password entry occurs after the modems trai
147. d to the Active Operating configuration area To access Reset from the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A Speaker Reset A lt ER gt Select Reset The message Reset appears momentarily before the modem performs the power up diagnostic test sequence Data Stream The Data Stream function is not available in Async mode Use Data Stream to enable or disable the modem s data transmitter function To access Data Stream from the Control branch make the following selections Control aX a a A Press the key until Data_Stream appears Select Data_Stream The Data Stream action which is available Disable or Enable appears on the second line of the LCD beside the word Port1 If the modem s data transmitter is enabled the word Disable appears to indicated that you may disable the data transmitter by selecting this action Data Stream A eee Disable a EJ E amp 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems If you want to disable the modem s data stream press the F2 key When the message Command Complete appears press the A key to clear the message Data Stream A Ee Enable a e BJ l amp Press the F2 key again to enable the modem s data stream To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Le
148. disabled then the status message Access Disabled appears on the LCD 13 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Remote Branch e Ifa connection is established but the wrong password is stored the status message Password Invalid appears on the LCD This configuration option must be enabled by the remote user Refer to the Remote Access Password configuration option in Table 5 8 of Chapter 5 DCP Configuration e The Remote mode command displays Other Test Active if an Analog Loopback test is currently running Diagnostic Control Panel Access NOTE This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of the DCP security access selections Use the DCP security access function to lock the DCP of any 391x Series modem and prevent unwanted user access Two options are available for this function Grant and Deny Grant allows any branch of the Top Level menu to be accessed from the DCP Deny only allows access to the Status branch of the Top Level menu All 391x Series modems are shipped from the factory with DCP access granted To access the Front Panel DCP Security Access function perform the following Press the A key three times Press the A key twice Press the A key once Frnt Panl Acces A Grant Deny 1A a re ro gt Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock DCP access Either selection results in a return to the To
149. dit NO Buffer Mode VA2IMNP Butier N1 Direct Mode N2 MNP or Disconnect N3 MNP or Buffer N4 V 42 MNP or Disconnect N5 V 42 MNP or Buffer N6 LAPM_or_Disc N7 LAPM_or_Bufr Qn Flow Control of DTE Flow Control of Modem Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer Flow Control Flow Control of DTE of Modem Q0 Disable Disable Q1 XON XOFF XON XOFF Q2 CTS to DTE Disable Q3 CTS to DTE RTS to Mdm Q4 XON XOFF Disable Q5 Disable XON XOFF Q6 Disable RTS to Mdm 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 2 10 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Description Command Command Sequence Tn No Data Disconnect Timer Configure Edit TO Disable Seales Tn Where nis a value from 1 to 255 in 1 minute increments NOTE The factory default value is country dependent Xn XON XOFF Passthrough Flow Control Configure Edit Xxo Disable V42 MNP Buffer X1 Enable An Error Control Fallback Character Configure Edit An Where nis an ASCII value from 0 to 127 Factory default is V42 MNP Buffer 013 ASCII Cn MNP5 Data Compression Configure Edit CO Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable Hn V 42bis Compression Configure Edit Ho Disable V42 MNP Buffer H1 Enable H2 Enable H3 Enable S Register List S Registers affect the operating parameters of the 391x Series modems S Registers are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is s
150. e e Async Leased Answer Originate TMp Control Trib e Async Dial e Sync Dial e UNIX Dial Load Edit Area From EDIT AREA ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND EDIT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ANY CHANGES MADE TO CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ARE SAVED TO Active Saved Customer1 OR Customer2 Figure 5 1 DCP Configuration Process 5 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Active Saved Customer Customer2 ATZO ATZ3 ATZ1 ATZ2 e Sync e Sync Dial Leased AT amp F1 Answer e Sync Leased AT amp F2 Originate Async AT amp F4 Leased e Async Leased Answer Originate AT amp F5 AT amp F6 e TMp e TMp Trib Control AT amp F8 AT amp F7 e UNIX Dial e Async Dial AT amp F3 AT amp FO LOAD Active Operating USING ATZ OR AT amp F COMMAND NOTE ON POWER UP Active Saved IS LOADED TO Active Operating Active Operating CHANGES MADE USING ANY AT COMMAND IMMEDIATELY AFFECT MODEM OPERATION USE AT amp W COMMAND TO SAVE CHANGES TO Active Saved Customer1 OR Customer2 NOTE THE AT amp W COMMAND IS DISABLED IF THE Straps When Disconnected CONFIGURATION OPTION IS SET TO Reload Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 AT amp WO AT amp W1 AT amp W2 Figure 5 2 AT Command Configuration Process 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Configure Branch The Configure branch of the Top Level menu contains all of the modem s configuration o
151. e 1 10 5 34 14 18 rear connector plate 1 4 rear panel connectors 1 44 1 5 2 2 2 3 C 2 Record Status branch 4 10 4 12 Remote access branch 3 8 13 14 13 5 remote access remote digital loopback test 8 5 8 10 remote joapbadie 5 46 requirements ac power 1 9 reset control 7 317 7 result codes 5 221 14 7 enable disable extended 5 23 14 8 list 14 37 14 4 numeric or word 5 23 14 7 ring count 5 25 ringer equivalence number REN 1 5 RTS Action Antistream RTS CTS Delay 5 15 password 5 545 8 5 49j 13 2 13 3 13 4 S Register list 14 14 14 28 Security 13 12 access Messages branch 3 8J 12 4112 12 configuration options 12 13 12 15 database tables 12 2 12 3 12 18412 19 passwords 12 24112 4 12 16 12 17 Select key 2 10 2 11 B 7 self test 8 34 8 10 self test 2 5 Send Break Control serial number Ser 4 6 service line 7 6 7 7 shared diagnostic control panel SDCP 1 5 3 2 soft straps See configuration options software download 7 Special Standby specifications technical 1 81 10 standby automatic dial restoring service Status branch 4 11 12 status indicators definitions LEDs 3 343 5 straps See configuration options Straps When Disconnected SubHS Sub Network Health and Status branch 3 8 mA 9 2 5 1 1 5 10
152. e 3 1 contains status indicators pushbutton type keys an LCD and speaker grill al JS eee 8 a PWR ALRM DIAG DTR RTS CTS TXD LSD RXD SQ TEST RATE DIAL COMSPHERE 3910 O O O O O O O O 108 105 106 103 109 104 142 496 14174 01 Figure 3 1 Model 3910 DCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel SDCP The shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Figure 3 2 is used to manage carrier mounted Model 3911 modems The faceplate of the Model 3911 contains status indicators that monitor the operation of the modem After the SDCP is connected to the modem the Front Panel indicator of the selected modem lights to show that the modem is connected 3 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation Status Indicators Status The 391x Series modems status indicators continuously provide information on the modem s operating condition All of the status indicators on the Model 3910 appear on the DCP Figure 3 1 whereas the status indicators for the carrier mounted Model 3911 are located on the Model 3911 s faceplate the SDCP and the SDU faceplate Figure 3 2 Status Pwr e Alrm 142 Test O Dial 125 Ri O Busy O serv Osa O Front Panel O CARRIER SLOTS 1 16 COMSPHERE 3000 _ ___ 496 14175 01 Seay STATUS KEYPAD LCD INDICATORS OK Alarm BckUp Test EC CGD oO O e s ERROR NETWORK CORRECTION DEVICE AL
153. e Edit xxxx Edit Save Yes No Save Edit Saves any changes made in the EditPassWdTable group m XXXX Indicates the current index field value Edit Returns the LCD to the Password Type option and does not save any changes made to the index or password table m Save Saves changes made to the index or Password Table Once selected the Select Index screen appears and increments to the next index value m Yes No Appears only if changes are made to any of the options within the Password Table and a menu level key is pressed before reaching the Save Edit option After deciding whether or not to save changes the LCD displays Select Index and increments to the next index value 12 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Set Answer Sec Set Answer Security determines if dial access security is enabled or disabled This method of inbound security is configured in the answering modem Although this also appears under the Security Configuration Option group it can only be changed from the Set Answer Sec LCD display in the Security branch To access Set Answer Sec from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Set Access Ctrl lt A a A Le Ls we Press the key until Set_Answer_Sec appears Select Set_Answer_Sec Table 12 2 describes the settings of the Set Answer Security group option Table 12 2 Set Answer Security Group Options Set Answer Sec No_Answ_Sec DT
154. e LCD vary depending upon the type of model installed its operating mode and software configuration Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins at the Top Level menu the head of the menu hierarchy The LCD s top line identifies the modem status as listed in Table 3 3 while the bottom line displays the main menu tree branches as well as operational and security messages as listed in Table 3 4 and Table 3 5 3 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation Table 3 3 1 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Normal Leased MR The modem is operating on leased lines and transmitting at the Operation displayed data rate Idle MR The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on hook OnLine MR The modem is online in Data mode and operating at the displayed EC data rate EC error control appears if error control is operational Ring Indicate The local modem is receiving an incoming ring Test MR The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate Alarm Make Busy The modem is in a Make Busy condition Power On Fail The modem has failed its Power On Self test SelfHealth Fail A failure has occurred in the modem s hardware components Call Setup Off Hook The modem is off hook and waiting to dial a telephone number Dialing The originating modem is dialing a telephone number Remote Ring The r
155. e No Answer Timeout configuration option A ringback signal was detected Trunk Busy The modem is receiving a fast trunk busy Wrong Call The call was answered but not by a modem No answer tone MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in Direct mode The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear the LCD alternates between the two message sets The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint TMp operation The Delayed Number and Forbidden Number messages appear only in countries where the number of repeat call attempts are restricted The regulations vary in each country If the number is delayed the value of the delay in minutes can be displayed by entering Directory Status see Call Setup Branch F The Line Occupied message appears only in countries where the Offhook Detector is enabled The purpose of the Offhook Detector is to detect whether the telephone assoc
156. e No Change No Change No Change No Change Disconnected Speaker Control Speaker Volume Access from Remote2 4 Remote Access Password2 4 Directory Location No 1 Callback NMS Call Messages2 Network Position Identification Network Management Address2 Diagnostic Connection Link Delay seconds On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Tributary 3910 or Control 3911 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Tributary TMp Trib or Control TMp Control 256 Modem DC NMS CC for TMp Control or Disable for TMp Trib 0 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC 2 This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 4 This configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1
157. e number dialed using the DCP must already exist in a directory location Refer to Change Directory on page 10 6 for information on storing telephone numbers in directory locations For leased backup applications Dial allows you to switch to the backup leased line Any directory location may be used The remote modem cannot automatically answer the simulated call Use the Answer function of the remote modem in conjunction with the Dial function to manually switch to the backup leased line To access Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt A ia Disconnect A o B lhe Select Dial to display the first directory telephone number DialDirectory EN Na 01 5551234 A lt F 2 Fs gt To view other directory locations select Nxt DialDirectory A R 02 5461879 A E gt 10 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Call Setup Branch Once the directory location you want appears on the LCD press the F2 or F3 key to dial the number DialDirectory 01 A S Hook a trjJlelle The Call Setup status Off Hook appears during the connection process If the connection is successful one of the Normal Operation status messages Table 3 3 in Chapter 3 DCP Operation appears on the LCD If the connection is not successful the LCD displays one of the Call Failure status messages Table 3 3 in C
158. e of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com e Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 727 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners ED Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1998 2002 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person o
159. e values of Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal Editing and saving a VF threshold is similar to editing and saving a configuration option For another example of editing and saving refer to Editing and Saving a Configuration Option in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration RSL High dBm ZA Nxt t 09 A a re r gt In the example shown above 09 is the upper High RSL threshold in dBm To change the 09 to 10 make the following selections RSL High dBm A a 19 B a lt EF gt Select the F2 ft key to increment the number above the cursor 0 to 1 NOTE Note that a warning H appears on the second line of the screen if you enter an invalid VF threshold out of range You will not be able to save your edits until all thresholds are within their valid range Refer to Table 7 1 for valid VF threshold ranges RSL High dBm eae 19 D ness e e zp 7 14 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch Press the key to move the cursor to the next position 9 Select the F2 ft key to change the number above the cursor 9 to 0 RSL High dBm a Be t10 a Le W le we NOTE If you want to modify additional VF thresholds select Nxt To save the edited threshold s RSL High dBm es tie t 10 A jax lLrjJlelle we
160. eased 19 2 A Control Test ae gt Press the key until Test appears Select Test Abort Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the modem back to the normal mode of operation Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete message To access Abort from the Test branch make the following selection Test gt A Abort Self A a8 FFs Select Abort Test Abort A Eas EETA A w eee Ls ow The modem stops all tests currently in progress and displays the Command Complete status message on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 8 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Test Branch Self Self performs an internal self test of the modem which takes less than a minute to complete The modem must be offline otherwise Invalid Command appears WARNING When this test is run in Remote mode it will cause the Remote mode session to be lost The Remote mode session can be reestablished after the self test is complete usually one or two minutes If the remote self test fails there will be a Device Failure alarm message when the remote modem s Device Health and Status DeviceHS branch is accessed To access Self from the Test branch make the following selection Test gt A Abort ar A 2008 Select Self All LCD cell
161. ect Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone Enable or ignore Busy Tone Disable NOTE This configuration option is normally enabled however if the modem receives false busy tones this configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones The AT commands for Disable are XO X1 and X2 The AT commands for Enable are X3 X4 X5 X6 and X7 Pause Time 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Pause Time Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the dial command string NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 2 4 6 8 10 or 20 values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to 255 seconds The AT command is S Register S8 n where nis from 0 to 255 in 1 second increments NoAnswer Timout 45sec Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec 120sec No Answer Abort Timeout Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call attempt when no answer tone is received NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 30 45 60 or 120 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 seconds NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S7 n where nis from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments 5 26 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 3 3 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options Fast Disconnect Disable Nxt Disable Enable Fast Disconnect A
162. edundancies and gaps in order to reduce storage capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted Anything that is compressed is restored after the data is received One of two general operating modes the other is Command mode When in Data mode the modem considers any input from the computer to be data and transmits it across the telephone line to the remote modem A decibel referenced to one milliwatt into 600 ohms This unit measures relative signal power Data Communications Equipment The equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection It also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the network Diagnostic Control Panel The front panel of a device that continuously provides status information about the device s operation and allows an operator to manage its operation A generic term used for both the standalone and carrier mounted models The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave Device Health and Status A detailed account of device alarms The diagnostic interface between two network devices like a DSU and a modem used to extend the NMS diagnostics to downstream devices A method of restoring service for data communications during a private line failure by switching the data traffic to the public telephone network A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed telephone number
163. effect m 10sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 5 min Enables the antistreaming function and sets the maximum ON time for RTS before antistreaming control takes effect The AT command is S Register S72 n where nis 0 for Disable 1 for 10 sec 2 for 30 sec 3 for 1 min 4 for 2 min 5 for 3 min and 6 for 5 min 5 14 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 1 6 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options CTS Control Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows DTR Follows _RTS40 Clear to Send Control CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE m Standard RS232 In Synchronous mode forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal ElIA 232 D operation The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS CTS Delay configuration option Use this setting for most synchronous applications In AT Command mode CTS goes low just prior to DSR going active and goes high when the modem enters Data mode This operation prevents losing data in applications which begin transmitting as soon as DSR and CTS are both active Forced On CTS is forced ON at all times Use this selection for most asynchronous applications Wink When Disconnect CTS is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Use this for most UNIX applications Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR W
164. egister has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 88 Straps When Disconnected Register determines whether or not Configure Edit configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are Misc reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs Register has the following values 0 or 231 No Change 1 or 232 Reload The factory setting is No Change 14 24 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 3 11 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 89 V 42 Automatic Request for Retransmission ARQ Window Size Increase Register allows the ARQ window size to be set to a value from six frames to fifteen frames For best performance this register should remain at its default setting of six frames ATS89 0 The only reason to change it is for satellite delays Register has the following values 0 six frames 1 seven frames 2 eight frames 3 nine frames 4 ten frames 5 eleven frames 6 twelve frames 7 thirteen frames 8 fourteen frames 9 fifteen frames The factory setting is 0 six frames This command only applies when the modem connects using V 42bis data compression or V 42 error control If the modem is configured for Direct mode MNP mode Buffer mode or Synchronous operation this command is invalid This command does not have a front panel equivalent
165. el menu press the A key The Clear function does not appear in Remote mode Clear deletes the modem s poll list To access Clear from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List gt A Display Clear amp lt re re gt Select Clear The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list has been cleared To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key The Change function does not appear in Remote Change allows you to change the modem s poll list To access Change from the PList branch make the following selections Poll List A Clear Change A l l W 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 6 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Press the key until Change appears Select Change Change allows you to add modems to the Active poll list Active delete modems from both Active and Skip poll lists Delete and move modems from the Active to the Skip poll list Poll List Chang gt A E Delete A m Je amp To implement Change select the appropriate function Active Delete or Skip For Skip you will need to press the key until Skip appears Poll List yyyyyy a eet XXX A a eL C The function field yyyyyy displays the function you selected Active Delete
166. elephone company Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information 1 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Introduction Canada NOTICE TO THE USERS OF THE CANADIAN PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnec
167. em Power Up 0 c cece eee Selecting Factory Configuration Options 04 Removing and Replacing Model 3910 Modems Model 3911 Modem Installation 0 0 Removing and Replacing Model 3911 Modems 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 i COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems 3 DCP Operation COVELVIEW sneered oT diene iat ee sie bade beds Ape ees Diagnostic Control Panels 0 00 cece eee eee eee Status Indicators ee ewe ee be eben e eee eee ee ees Diagnostic Control Panel Operation 00 Menu Stricture ic haat steed eeiaua esas deen dees heed 4 Status Branch OVERVIEW eens Ae cere ee E tele Big dead a ieee bedi Bide 4 1 5 DCP Configuration OVEIVICW erriei ereer ARS AES tthe beth ak Bae teats Godee ate Configure Branch 00 cee cee ee eee teens Configuration Tables 6 Poll List Branch OVERVIEW Shaner id Teee E Aaa bale We eae Ee wand Wa ace 6 1 7 Control Branch Make Busy Remove Make Busy 020000000 ee Service Line Disconnect Service Line 0 00 eee Download Software 0 0 0 c ccc ce ete eens VF Thresholds Update 0 0 00 cee eee eee eee 8 Test Branch ADOM sese edoae busch evo erara ate bee Ne gs ase arin odes ei nls Loc Analog Loop 0 0 cece cece eee e eens Rem Digital Loop 20 0 eee eee teenies Lo Digital LOO sec 44 sci
168. emote modem is ringing Training The modem is training or retraining EC Negotiating The local and remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of error control compatible between both modems Once a level is selected this LCD message disappears Dial Backup or Leased Backup Standby MR The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode DialBckUp MR The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate and is configured for Direct mode Backup MR The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for EC error control and data compression on leased lines Standby MR The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for EC error control and data compression on leased lines MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in Direct mode The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear the LCD alternates between the two message se
169. ems connect Security Branch The Security branch of the Top Level menu allows you to change and save parameters that are critical to the dial access security password database This database is a collection of passwords and their associated parameters that determine how the modems control password access Most of the functions within this branch are protected by an Administrative Password Once the correct password is entered these security functions display on the modem s LCD The two major functions that appear under the Security branch are Set Access Control and Reset Security Tik Data Security Set_Access_Ctrl Reset_Security Admin Password EditPassWdTable Set_Answer_Sec Set_Orig_Secur Set_Admin_PsWd Set Access Control allows you to change security configuration This function is protected by an Administrative Password The Reset Security function allows you to reset the Administrative Password but results in erasure of the modem s security database To access Security from the Top Level menu make the following selections ae lt Zs Security Remote A o S jle we Press the key until Security appears Select Security 12 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Set Access Ctrl Admin Password Set Access Control allows you to configure critical parameters contained within the security database table that control dial access security These parame
170. enabled BackupLineCheck Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is installed Backup Line Check Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary leased lines The test involves detecting line energy across the normal bandwidth This test of the backup lines will not interrupt the data flow on the primary lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends NOTE In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the modem connected to the primary leased line enabling this configuration option can cause problems V 42 MNP Buffer V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options determine the type of error correction and flow control used by the modems and attached DTEs Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected If the Async Sync Mode configuration option is set for synchronous operation refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group then the V 42 MNP Buffer group does not appear on the LCD Any changes made to configuration options within this group only take effect after a disconnect Table 5 6 shows each V 42 MNP Buffer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default setting shown following the colon on the first line and with all available
171. ephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone Figure C 2 lia iat Rat Rate Rate Baie 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO ae ee ae a a MODEM PELL LL ELLE ELLE LLL LEE LL EELS EEL errr rr G a S Sas Sias Siaa ta Taas a S Sias Sias Siaa taaa taas as aS SAAMAA AMAMMA 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO E TELEPHONE FE EE I EI EE EE ae ee a a nc i nn ah Ok i nnn TTT 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO E Re PHONE LINE Seen ne EE LLL EL ELL ELE a a a a at 493 14173 Figure C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External Telephone C 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Pin Assignments aN Dar UN gt For 2 wire leased line connections to a JM8 network interface use an 8 position to 6 position crossover cable Figure C 3 according to the following FCC requirements The RJ series of jacks should not be used for connecting data equipment to nonswitched private line networks specifically the service equivalents of the pre divestiture Series 3002 Category II Tariff 260 service There is a substantial difference in transmit levels permitted in the private line service and those permitted in the public switched network The industry standard is now an 8 pin keyed modular jack known as the USOC JM8 Bellcore Technical Reference TR EOP 000242 Issue 1 released May 1985 When ordering the installation of the USOC JMS specify the ap
172. er 70 V 27bis Train Register controls the train time for V 27bis operation Register has the following values 0 Short 1 Long The factory setting is Short Configure Edit Leased Line S71 XTXC Clamps TXC Register allows the modem s TXC output to be clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit DTE Interface 14 22 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 3 9 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 72 RTS Antistreaming Register determines the antistreaming operation of the modem Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 10sec 2 30 sec 3 1 min 4 2 min 5 3min 6 5 min The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface S74 Network Position Identification Register identifies each modem as either a control or tributary modem Register has the following values 0 Tributary 1 Control The factory setting is Tributary Configure Edit Misc S75 Network Management Address Register determines the modem s network address This address is used when accessing the modem from the 6700 Series NMS Enter a value from 0 network address 001 to 255 network address 256 The factory setting is 0 Configure Ed
173. er State of LSD follows state of remote modem s RTS amp C5 DTR Disconnect Off State of LSD follows state of DTR except upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and ON to turn LSD ON Use this setting for AT amp T DATAKIT applications Note that to use this option the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 amp D1 or amp D2 amp Dn DTR Action Configure Edit amp DO Ignore Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it DTE eae as always ON amp D1 amp D2 amp D3 Standard RS232 DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE amp D4 Controls On Hook Modem does not disconnect from the VF line until DTR turns OFF amp D5 Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The amp L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting Leased Line mode Therefore it must be entered as the last command in an initialization string Table 14 2 6 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Fn Select Factory Default Configuration Options Loads factory configuration Configure options into Active Operating area Factory amp FO Async Dial amp F1 Sync Dial amp F2 Sync Leased Answer amp F3 UNIX Dial amp F4 Sync Leased Originate amp F5 Async Leased Answer amp F6 Async Leased Originate amp F7 T
174. er Ring Number Register determines number of rings the Configure Edit modem will count before automatically answering a call Line Dialer Enter zero 0 if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any calls Otherwise enter a value from 1 255 for the number of rings to count before answering The factory setting is 1 2 AT Escape Character Register determines ASCII value used for Configure Edit escape sequence to enter Command mode from Data mode DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the escape character Any value greater than 127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence When the escape sequence is disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode until the call is disconnected The factory setting is 43 key 3 Carriage Return Character Register determines ASCII value used as Configure Edit the carriage return Return key This character is used to end DTE Dialer command lines and result codes Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character The factory setting is 13 carriage return key S4 Line Feed Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure Edit line feed character DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 127 for the line feed character The factory setting is 10 ASCII carriage return or line feed 1 The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems incremen
175. er than 19 200 bps or distances greater than 50 feet The rear panel of the Model 3910 modem Figure 2 1 has the following switches and connectors An ON OFF power switch An 8 pin DIN type power receptacle PWR for the dc power supply An 8 pin modular keyed jack LEASED for 4 wire 2 wire leased lines An 8 pin modular keyed jack DIAL for backup lines 2 wire dial or 2 wire leased A 4 pin modular jack for the NMS network management system connection A 25 pin DB 25 S receptacle for the DTE interface 2 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation Connecting Cables to the Model 3910 Modems Figure 2 1 shows how Model 3910 modems are connected to certain TELCO jack types using the appropriate cables For pin assignments refer to Appendix C Pin Assignments DTE 2 DTE3 DTE 4 eee ele LEASED DIAL DTE 1 NMS PWR ON OFF io I K a 8 POSITION i 8 CONDUCTOR PLUG FOR DB 25 P LEASED LINE BENNE ER NETWORK i OPERATION FOR DATA i TERMINAL EQUIPMENT OPERA
176. estrict entry to the host DTE by ensuring that originating remote modems and or users have been granted proper security access Access can be granted by using one of three techniques VF side password entry DTE side password entry or a combination of both VF Side Passwords VF side password entry occurs between modems prior to connecting Once the VF side password is entered no other user intervention is required since security negotiation is handled solely by the modems When the answering modem is configured for VF entry technique it goes off hook and transmits to the originating modem either a secondary dial tone or silence this choice depends on how the VF Prompt Type option is configured The originating modem detects this response and transmits its password which corresponds to a preselected series of DTMF tones Note that VF passwords can be from 1 to 8 digits in length only decimal digits are permitted The answering modem verifies the password against its own password database and if valid continues with the normal training sequence VF side password works with any autodialer that supports second dial tone or quiet answer and can be implemented in one of three ways First the VF password can be embedded within the AT command dial string Second a phone number and password can be entered via the diagnostic control panel DCP This is the preferred method for synchronous applications And finally an attached telephone can be use
177. et for AT Refer to the amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 14 3 lists all S Registers supported by the 391x Series modems The first column lists the S Register The second column lists all possible values for that register The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent from the DCP Use this column to reference commands in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration if further description is necessary NOTE In some countries the range of allowable values of some S Registers are restricted If the DTE attempts to enter an illegal value the modem will answer OK but it will set the register to the closest legal value The DTE can check the actual value of the register with Sn command 14 14 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers S Register Format S Registers can be displayed and or modified when the modem is in Command mode To display the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn Where n is the register number PRESS Enter To modify the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn r Where n is the register number and r is the new value PRESS Enter In Table 14 3 the value for n is listed in the S Register column and the value for r is listed in the Description column Table 14 3 1 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence SO Auto Answ
178. ete a data communications system using the Model 3910 modem A DTE with an available EIA 232 D serial port A standard EIA 232 D cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem One of the following modular leased or dial network interfaces JM8 for leased line applications RJIIC for dial permissive applications The following customer supplied equipment is required for the installation of a Model 3911 modem A COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A 50 pin mass termination cable One of the following modular or 50 pin leased or dial network interfaces RJIIC for single line dial permissive applications RJ21X for multiple line dial permissive applications 66 punchdown block One Network Interface Module NIM for modems installed in Slots 1 8 and one NIM for modems installed in Slots 9 16 required for dial line applications For installation of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier into a cabinet refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Model 3910 Modem Installation Before installing your standalone modem make sure your installation site is clean and well ventilated Allow space around the modem for installing cables and telephone cords and make sure the modem is located within reach of the ac power outlet The distance between your modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data rates exceed 19 200 bps Also low capacitance cables may be necessary for speeds great
179. evel menu allows you to display alarm conditions in downstream modems To access the SubHS branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 a Test SubHS A a re gt 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 9 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Press the key until SubHS appears Select SubHS NOTE If there are no modems in the multipoint poll list the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD Sub network HS IN ie xxx yyyyyy MaN D 2 r gt When you select SubHS XXX Displays the network management address of the downstream modem selected yyyyyy Displays the status of the downstream modem This message is updated every several seconds to display the latest status MAJOR MINOR and STATUS display Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 4 1 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of Chapter 4 Status Branch for additional information UNKNWN appears when the modem does not recognize the downstream health and status information or device communication is not established Normal appears if no alarms are present NO RSP appears when the downstream modem does not respond to the poll Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the poll lists To exit this function and return to the Top Level menu press the 7S key 9 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Call Setup Branch
180. f such revision or changes A February 2002 3910 A2 GN32 41 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adaptor Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cab
181. for configuration options Leased Backup Applications In leased backup applications a 2 wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup COMSPHERE 391 x Series Models The 391x Series family is available in two models the Model 3910 a 4 wire 2 wire standalone modem and the Model 3911 a carrier mounted version of the standalone unit Both models offer a variety of modulation schemes and network enhancements while still providing reliable high speed data transmission using the latest in modem technology 1 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Introduction Standalone Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem The standalone Model 3910 modem Figure 1 1 is capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation The modem is controlled using either AT commands or the diagnostic control panel DCP The DCP consists of a liquid crystal display LCD three function keys four directional keys and a row of 13 LED status indicators For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation DIAGNOSTI
182. for the 391x Series modems Appendix B provides instructions for performing diagnostic tests when data communication problems occur i 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 ix COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Appendix C provides EIA 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments Appendix D provides V 25bis dialing information Appendix E provides an ASCII translation chart Appendix F provides a list of all default configuration options available for the factory preset configurations Appendix G provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 391x Series modems Appendix H provides an equipment list for the 391x Series modems The Glossary provides a description of terms used throughout this manual Related Documents 3000 A2 GA31 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual 3610 A2 GZA45 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F 3 300 Installation Instructions 3910 A2 GK41 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Models 3910 and 3911 Installation Instructions Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product documentation Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at http www paradyne com Select Service amp Support Technical Manuals September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Features Introduction The COMSPHERE 391x Series modems a new generation of full feature high speed modems offer reliable asynchronous and synchronous operation over leased line or dial networks
183. from the DCP without impacting modem operation The edit area can be loaded from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry to ensure uniformity of interface between DTEs and DCEs An Electronic Industries Association standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment An algorithm used to detect and correct data transmission errors Default setting is This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to Command mode The extension of a circuit where the tributary DCE is connected to a downstream extended control DCE An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that includes VF data rate and error control information that the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command Retraining at a lower rate or speed Federal Communications Commission The Board of Commissioners that regulates all electrical communications that originate in the United States Forward Error Correction A method of error control for data transmission where the receiving device can detect and correct a character or block of code containing a predetermined number of erroneous bits Front End Processor A communications computer associated with a host computer that manages the lines and r
184. function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test pattern It can also be used with a currently running local analog loopback or a remote digital loopback to simulate data passing through the modem You will need to start the local analog or remote digital loopback test before you start the pattern test For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode Figures 8 4 through 8 6 TRANSMITTER GENERATOR 511 PATTERN DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE 511 PATTERN RECEIVER 491 13075a Figure 8 4 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 8 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems RECEIVER COMPARATOR 511 PATTERN TRANSMITTER DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE 511 PATTERN LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM sear Figure 8 5 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test RECEIVER TRANSMITTER COMPARATOR GENERATOR 511 PATTERN 511 PATTERN DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTF 511 PATTERN 511 PATTERN TRANSMITTER RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM nie Figure 8 6 End to End Pattern Test To access Pattern from the Test branch make the following selections Test lt ay ee A B lej amp Press the key until Pattern appears Select Pattern to start this test Test Pattern gt A BI
185. gital_Loop and Pattern appear if the secondary channel is used Rem_Digital_Loop does not appear in TMp mode Does not appear if configured for Synchronous mode Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected 98 16129b Set_Admin_PsWd 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 A 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank A 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Troubleshooting This appendix points out basic problems that can occur when operating a 391x Series modem Use Tables B 1 through B 6 to check out these problems If you are having data communication difficulties such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors use the loopback tests described in Chapter 8 Test Branch With these tests you can usually isolate the fault in your system by using the process of elimination If problems continue to occur contact your service representative Table B 1 Modem Health Symptom Action The modem did not pass the power up self test Contact your service representative The power LED does not light or the LCD does not display information Make sure the modem s ON OFF switch is in the ON position Make sure the power supply is connected to the dc power receptacle on the modem If the Power LED and or LCD do not operate contact your service representative
186. guration options with the following exceptions Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC Network Position Set to Control Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EJA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments Use part number 125 0040 0031 a 6 position 6 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of the 3600 Hubbing device Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of one 3600 Hubbing device and to the CCOUT DCIN port of the second device Use part number 002 0026 0031 Feature number 4400 F 1 590 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Equipment List H Equipment Feature Part Number Model 3910 3910 A1 40X Model 3911 3911 B1 00X 6 position 4 wire modular cord 7 foot length 125 0067 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 14 foot length 125 0053 1431 Universal Power Supply 327 0074 0131 3600 Hubbing Device 3600 F3 300 EIA 323 D V 24 Crossover Cable 818 2759 0111 6 position
187. h blocks the Acquire function The Unable To Acquir message indicates that the diagnostic network is in a busy state Poll List Acquir ZX Ke xxx yyy A jejxX e EE The address field xxx increments sequentially from 001 to 256 as polls are transmitted from the modem to the downstream modem s To be added to the modem s poll list the device must respond to a poll after receiving its address The Acquire function can be canceled by selecting Abort The number field yyy indicates the total number of devices that responded to the modem s polls These devices have been acquired for the poll list Select Abort or allow the function to complete Poll List Acquir LS Fa Acquired a A a e Ls ow The number field yyy indicates the total number of devices acquired for the poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 6 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Control Branch The Control branch of the Top Level menu allows you to manage hardware and software functions such as speaker volume reset busy out and firmware download 3911 only Speaker Reset Data_Stream Make_Busy Service _Line Download _Code VF_Thresh_Update or or DownLoadSoftware RemoveMakeBusy DiscServiceLine 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems
188. hapter 3 DCP Operation Disconnect For dial backup applications use this function when you want to disconnect an established call on a dial line For leased backup applications use this function to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt A Dial Disconnect A a gt Select Disconnect Disconnect A Ene ER A lt m r ro gt For dial backup applications the modem goes on hook hangs up and the call is disconnected The Command Complete status message appears To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 10 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Answer For dial backup applications Answer allows the modem to go off hook generate an answer tone and begin the handshaking process with the calling modem Use the Answer function when the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is disabled Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration For leased backup applications Answer allows the modem to begin the handshaking process with the remote modem To access Answer from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A eae AJ J le le Press the key unti
189. hat contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment The label is located on the bottom of the Model 3910 modem This label is located on the Model 3911 s circuit card assembly If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company Page A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes USOC associated with the services on which the equipment is to be connected An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See Installation Instructions for details The ringer equivalence REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area If the 391x Series modem causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone compan
190. hen DTR turns ON CTS turns ON When DTR turns OFF CTS turns OFF Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS When RTS turns ON CTS turns ON When RTS turns OFF CTS turns OFF NOTE When CTS flow control or CTS RTS flow control is enabled CTS will turn ON and OFF regardless of the setting of CTS Control The AT command for Forced On is DO The AT command for Standard RS232 is D1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is D2 The AT command for Follows DTR is DS The AT command for Follows RTS is D4 RTS CTS Delay Omsec Nxt Omsec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec Request to Send Clear to Send Delay RTS CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE NOTE This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data NOTE For this configuration option to be valid both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be set to Stndrd RS232 If RTS Action is set to Ignore RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no effect The AT command is S Register S26 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 10 millisecond increments 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 7 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options LS
191. i 0 The Call Setup function is not available in TMp Control mode For dial backup applications the Call Setup branch of the Top Level menu allows you to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls For leased backup applications the Call Setup branch allows you to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line In leased backup operation a 2 wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup a r CR e a Ca Dial Backup only Dial l j I Disconnect Answer Dial_Standby Change_Directory Directory_Status or i Does not appear Return_to_Dial in North America Directory Locations 1 24 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 10 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access the Call Setup branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A Call_Setup lt e2 F gt Press the key until Call_Setup appears Select Call_Setup Dial For dial backup applications Dial allows you to dial any telephone number stored in directory locations 1 24 Any telephon
192. ial line communication The AT command is S Register S47 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for 15min 2 for 1hr 3 for 4hrs 4 for Test 2min 5 for Adv 15min 6 for Adv 30min 7 for Adv 1 hr and 8 for TestAdv2min SpecialStandby Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode or if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Advi5min Adv30min Adv1hr or TestAdv 2min Special Standby Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial backup When the leased line is restored the Special Standby configuration allows the leased line modems to return service to the original point to point modems NOTE When the modems are set for normal dial standby 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting primary data on the dial lines NOTE When the modems are set for advanced dial standby Adv15min Adv 30min Advihr or Adv Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows a non interruptive algorithm to test the original point to point lease connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines The AT command is S Register S98 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Dial StandbyTime 10min Nxt
193. ial tone dial modifiers is the wait for quiet answer dial modifiers 12345678 is the 8 digit password VF side passwords can be from 1 to 8 digits long and are restricted to decimal digits is the password terminator character While pulse dial can be used to originate the call DTMF tones must be used for the password This can be accomplished by using the P and T modifiers appropriately Refer to the Dial command in Chapter 14 AT Command Set and S Registers for more on modifiers NOTE A DTE side password is entered after the modems have trained but before a normal connection is established The following example illustrates how to enter a DTE side password TYPE PRESS Where abc123 Enter abc123 is a 6 alphanumeric character password Characters used for DTE side passwords are case insensitive DTE side passwords can be from 1 to 6 characters in length If a valid password is entered then the modems connect and data can pass 12 16 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Originate Access Password An Originate Access password is entered by a local user to gain access to a local 391x Series modem This password is embedded in the AT dial command and cannot be entered from the diagnostic control panel DCP The following example describes how to enter an Originate Access security password TYPE ATD abce123 T9 800555 1234 PRESS Enter Where ATD is the AT dial command T is
194. iated with the modem is off hook It is enabled on a per country basis and this setting cannot be changed by a command The Offhook Detector is enabled in Austria Germany and Switzerland 3 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation Table 3 3 3 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Call Disconnect ATH Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command Bad Lines Disc The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the modulation and or data rate selected No Carrier Disc The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote modem DTR Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE EC Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to failure to negotiate Error Control mode Inv Rate Disc When using V 32bis modulation the remote modem does not support the data rate used by the local modem LnCurrnt Disc The modem has disconnected due to the loss of line current LongSpace The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space Disc NoData Disc The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received data Disconnecting The modem has begun the disconnect sequence RmtCmnded The modem has disconnected due to a V 32 Cleardown received Disc from the remote modem Talk Mode The modem is in Talk mode Firmware
195. iguration Options Err Contrl Mode Continued Nxt V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP_or_Buffr MNP _or Disc BufferMode DirectMode LAPM_or_Disc LAPNM_or_Bufr The AT command for Buffer Mode is NO The AT command for Direct Mode is N1 The AT command for MNP or Disconnect is N2 The AT command for MNP or Buffer is N3 The AT command for V42 MNP or Disconnect is N4 The AT command for V42 MNP or Buffer is N5 The AT command for LAPM or Disconnect is N6 The AT command for LAPM or Buffer is N7 V42bis Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr or V42 MNPorDsc V 42bis Data Compression Enables or disables V 42bis data compression Enable Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions This is the recommended setting for all applications Disable V 42bis data compression is disabled This is rarely needed because V 42bis data compression does not cause data expansion for compressed data The AT command for Disable is HO The AT command for Enable is H1 H2 or H3 MNP5 Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP_or_Buffr or MNP_or_Disc MNP5 Compression Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 da
196. ing Factory Configuration Options After the modem passes the power up self test configure it for operation using one of the six factory preset configurations The 391x Series modems have six factory preset templates that contain the most commonly used configuration options straps for Synchronous Leased Answer or Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Originate Trellis Multipoint Control or Tributary Asynchronous Dial Synchronous Dial and UNIX Dial hardware network configurations Your modem ships from the factory with the Synchronous Leased Answer default configuration options stored in memory If Synchronous Leased Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Originate Trellis Multipoint TMp Control or Tributary Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial is more appropriate for your configuration then you must change the factory setting using either the modem s DCP or the AT command set as described in the following sections The purpose of having preset configurations is so that you can have a head start in getting your modem operating and reducing the amount of time required to configure your modem For a better understanding of DCP operation and factory preset configuration options refer to Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP The DCP s liquid crystal display LCD consists of two 16 character lines which display modem status control functions and configuration options as well as i
197. ion MNP5 N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Compression EC Negotiate N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Buffer EC Fallback N A N A N A N A N A N A Character Flow Control of N A CTS_to DTE N A CTS_to DTE CTS_to DTE N A DTE Flow Control of N A RTS_to_Modem N A RTS_to Modem RTS_to_Modem N A Modem XON XOFF N A N A N A N A N A N A Passthrough Modem to Mode N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A m Flow Control Break Buffer N A Keep Data N A Keep Data Keep Data N A Control Send Break N A Data First N A Data First Data First N A Control Buffer Disconnect N A 10 seconds N A 10 seconds 10 seconds N A Delay Maximum Frame N A 256 N A 256 256 N A Size Reduced Async N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Buffer Size Test DTE RL CT140 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DTE LL CT141 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Test Timeout Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Receive Remote Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Loopback V 54 Address Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable V 54 Device Type N A N A N A N A N A N A F 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 6 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Ballon Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Misc Straps When No Change No Chang
198. ion options do not have an equivalent AT command Table 12 4 1 of 3 Security Configuration Options EntryWait_Time 20 sec Nxt 20sec 10sec 40sec 60sec This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec Entry Wait Timeout Determines how long the answering modem waits for the originating modem to enter a VF side password and DTE side password NOTE This timer resets for each phase of access security For example if a VF side password and a DTE side password are required then the user has 20 seconds per entry to input the correct password VF_Prompt_Type 2nd_DialTone Nxt 2nd_DialTone Quiet_Answer This configuration option only appears if Answer Security Mode is configured for VF_ amp _DTE VF Prompt Type Determines how the answering modem requests a valid password from the originating modem for the valid password This configuration option is only used for VF side password entry and is not valid for DTE side password entry m 2nd Dial Tone Once the answering modem is off hook it generates a dial tone to the originating modem as a prompt for that modem s VF side password Second dial tone is represented by a W in the dial command string m Quiet Answer Once the answering modem is off hook it does not send an answer tone to the originating modem The originating modem enters its VF side password after detecting a ring back signal followed by five seconds of silence For th
199. irmware revision level is an alphanumeric number that identifies the level of firmware loaded in the modem HPt Hardware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies the circuit card in the modem FPt Firmware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies to customer service personnel the firmware release number To exit the Identity function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key 4 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Status Branch DTE Backup DTE displays the state and or activity of the following interface leads LSD DTR DSR Tst TXD RXD RTS and CTS The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds To access DTE from the Status branch make the following selections ae A Identity l l W Press the key until DTE appears Select DTE tee DTR DSR Tst gt A _ E E Le Le Ls The activity and state of the modem s DTE signal appear on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll other signals into view The LCD s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead The first symbol indicates the signal s activity since entering the DTE status display An asterisk indicates at least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time A IJ solid block indicates a Space or
200. is Coded Modulation Paradyne s advanced Trellis Coded transparent forward error correction for Trellis multipoint and high speed point to point applications Mixed inbound rates for multipoint applications Convenient migration to new or optional features through software downloading Extended data circuits with diagnostics Network management system NMS support through the COMSPHERE 6800 or 6700 Series NMS using Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp Complement of self tests local and remote loopbacks ITU T V 42bis and MNP Class 5 data compression Virtual error free data integrity with ITU T V 42 and MNP Level 4 error control Dial access security Automatic and manual backup with standby capabilities for 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications The backup facility may be either a 2 wire dial line or a 2 wire leased line 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 1 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Multipoint Applications In multipoint applications leased line circuits are used for time sharing the same front end processor FEP port with multiple remote locations The FEP via the control modem regulates traffic on the line by continuously polling the tributary DTE s in a predefined sequence Only one tributary can communicate with the control modem at a given time Modems configured for Trellis Multipoint TMp cannot be used in a point to point constant carrier application Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration
201. is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt i and keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will receive the download Choose Password A Ent tyyyyyyyy A B jle we The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password for the modem that will receive the download To increment digits within the password field yyyyyyyy use the lt 1 and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 ft key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will receive the download 7 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch After completing these actions proceed to Implementing a Clone Remote Operation on page 7 12 Cloning a Multiple TMp Remote Choose DLL Type gt A Single Multiple A ah eS Press the F3 key to select Multiple Clone Remote After completing this action proceed to Implementing a Clone Remote Operation on page 7 12 Viewing Multiple TMp Clone Results Choose DLL Type gt A e A a e e From the Choose DLL Type screen press the key until the MPtCloneResults screen appears to view the results of the last multiple TMp clone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a mul
202. is to work correctly the Auto Answer Ring configuration option in the answering modem must be set to 2 rings or greater Quiet answer is represented by an in the dial command string DTE_PW_Tries 1 Nxt 12 3 4 5 This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec Number of DTE Password Tries Determines the number of attempts an originating user has to enter a valid DTE side password If the password entered does not match a value in the answering modem s Password Table then the modem will issue the password prompt again provided that the number of tries is set toa value greater than 1 This will continue until the correct password is entered by the originating user or the number of tries allowed is met DTE_PW_TermChar 013 Nxt t 013 This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 12 4 2 of 3 Security Configuration Options DTE Password Termination Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to indicate the end of a password or User ID entered by an originating user This character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 DTE_PW_BkSpChar 008 Nxt 008 This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec DTE Password Backspace Character Sets the character that i
203. isable Disable Disable Disable Disable Control DTE Rate VF N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Extend Main Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Channel Upstream Port Port1 Port1 Port1 Porti Porti Port1 DTE SNE Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Alarms 1 This configuration option is country dependent F 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 2 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options r 5 Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial a e Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Dialer DTE Dialer Type Disable AT Disable AT AT Disable AT Escape N A 043 ASCII N A 043 ASCII 043 ASCII N A Character Escape Guard N A 1 sec N A 1 sec 1 sec N A Time Break Forces N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Escape Command N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Character Echo Carriage Return N A 013 ASCII N A 013 ASCII 013 ASCII N A Character Backspace N A 008 ASCII N A 008 ASCII 008 ASCII N A Character Linefeed N A 010 ASCII N A 010 ASCII 010 ASCII N A Character Result Codes N A Enable N A Enable Enable In N A Originate Extended Result N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Codes Result Codes N A Words N A Words Words N A Format AT Command N A Normal N A Normal Normal N A Mode V 25bis Coding N A N A N A N A N A N A V 25bis Idle Fill N A N A N A N A N A N
204. it Dial S76 V 32bis Autorate Dial Line Register determines if Autorating is used on dial lines when connected in V 32bis mode Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Dial Line S78 V 32bis Automode Dial Line Register allows the modem when operating on dial lines to automatically detect and connect to the remote modem s modulation scheme Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Dial Line 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 23 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 3 10 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence 82 V 32bis Autorate Leased Line Register determines if Autorating is Configure Edit used on leased lines when connected in V 32bis mode Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S84 AT Command Mode Register determines how the modem responds to Configure Edit valid and invalid AT commands DTE Dialer Register has the following values 0 Normal 1 No ERROR 2 No Strap or ERROR The factory setting is Normal S85 Fast Disconnect Register allows the modem to disconnect Configure Edit immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE Line Dialer or its own diagnostic control panel R
205. ksErrd xxxxxxx A j lejl amp 8 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Test Branch BlksErrd xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of data found in error block size is 1000 bits per block BIksRevd xxxxxxx displays the total number of blocks of data received The message NoSync appears as a value for BlksErrd while the modem s receiver is synchronizing The message OvrFlw appears as the value for BlksErrd if the counter overflows Press the key to display BIksRcvd xxxxxxx number of blocks of data received The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without restarting the test The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd continue counting If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to Test in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the key 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 8 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 8 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Sub Network Health and Status Branch Overview The Sub Network Health and Status SubHS function is not available on multipoint tributary modems or with certain modulations V 29 V 33 V 22bis and V 27bis The SubHS branch of the Top L
206. l Nxt Internal External RXC_Loop This configuration option only appears in customized installations in which the Dual_Leased_Ln is configured for Enable and Async Sync Mode is Sync Backup Transmit Clock Source Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode This is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another m Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the ElIA 232 D interface m External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface m Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface XTXC Clamps TXC Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears if TX Clock Source is configured for External External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock Allows the modem s TXC output Pin 15 on the EIA 232 D interface to be clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for External m Enable TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External Disable TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for External The AT command is S Register S71 n where nis 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 17 CO
207. l Answer appears Select Answer Answer A oe ERRE A Le Le Ls The modem goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection in Answer mode The Command Complete status message appears on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 10 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Call Setup Branch Dial Standby Return to Dial When the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode DialBckUp Dial Standby and Return to Dial allow the modem to switch back and forth between primary leased line and primary leased line backup operation while still maintaining the backup connection Figure 10 1 Switching between backup and primary leased line operation can be performed manually or automatically Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration to enable the Automatic Dial Backup configuration option DIAL BACKUP LINE DIAL RETURN A STANDBY TO DIAL LEASED LINE FAILURE 496 13081 01 Figure 10 1 Dial Backup Under normal backup conditions when a problem occurs on the primary leased line the modems establish a connection over the backup network a Setup A Dial Standby When this occurs Dial Standby appears on the LCD in the Call Setup menu branch If you select Dial Standby the modem switches back to the primary leased line while still maintaining the backup connection As a
208. l Tone Detect in some countries Busy Tone Detect Enable Modem monitors for busy tone Disable Modem ignores busy tone Yn Long Space Disconnect Configure Edit YO Disable Ignores long space Line Ligler Y1 Enable Disconnects if long space is detected Enables transmission of a long space 14 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers DTR drops on the DTE interface This can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE Only the Standard RS232 setting is allowed in Austria Table 14 2 5 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Zn Reset and Load Active Control Reset ZO Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating Z1 Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Active Operating Z2 Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active Operating Z3 Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating and performs a reset amp Cn LSD Control Configure Edit amp CO Forced On LSD ON at all times PLE IMenaee amp C1 Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the remote modem s carrier signal is detected LSD is OFF when carrier signal is not detected amp C2 Wink When Disconnect LSD normally forced ON turns OFF for approximately one second upon disconnecting amp C3 Follows DTR State of LSD follows state of DTR amp C4 Simulated Control Carri
209. latile memory locations that allow you to store up to 24 telephone numbers Each directory location can accept up to 40 characters this includes the telephone number and dial command modifiers Any telephone number dialed using the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory location NOTE If the modem is operating on leased lines and has a dial line attached for dial backup purposes it is required that directory location 1 contain the telephone number used for dial backup To access Change Directory from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup lt A Change_Directory A 10 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Call Setup Branch Press the key until Change_Directory appears Press any function key to select Change_Directory 01 551234 A Nxt T The phone number listed in directory location 1 appears Select Nxt to display other directory locations Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations The following example uses an empty directory location for describing how to enter a telephone number If you want to change an existing telephone number in any of the 24 directory locations follow the same procedures To add a telephone number to a directory location make the following selections Select Nxt until a blank directory appears on the LCD The cursor _ always appears in the first character position
210. lback This configuration option controls whether or not the modem s single number callback function is used Disable Modem does not use the single number callback function m Enable Modem answers a call disconnects and dials the number stored in directory location 1 NOTE This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled The AT Command to Disable is S Register S67 0 The AT Command to Enable is S Register S67 1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 49 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 8 3 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options NMS_Call_Msgs CallCnct amp Prg Nxt CallCnct amp Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly NMS Call Messages Determines if the modem status and or call summary information is sent to the NMS The modem can itemize status such as CallProgress messages or it can report a summary of activity such as Call Connect messages to the NMS Call Connect amp Progress Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS Disable Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS Call Connect Only The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of these statistics to the NMS The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports Call Progress Only The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS These messages include any events that can display on the LCD
211. les are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electri
212. llows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Disable The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space disconnect This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a disconnection m Enable Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a disconnect command NOTE This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem which may interpret the disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect The AT command is S Register S85 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Line Crnt Disc Enab gt 8msec Nxt Enab gt 8msec Enab gt 90msec Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 Line Current Disconnect Determines the modem s response to short interruptions of line current The loss of line current is one method of disconnecting a call m Enable gt 8 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds m Enable gt 90 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds Use this setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab gt 8msec Disable Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting The AT command is S
213. local loopback or self test Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test Abort the test disconnect the modular VF cord and restart the test 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 B 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table B 6 Online Operation Symptom Action The data is scrambled Verify that the character format data bits parity and stop bits is set to the same value in both modems Data is missing during a transfer Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem and the DTE If using XON XOFF flow control verify that the modem s parity matches the DTE s parity B 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Pin Assignments This appendix lists E A 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments and provides information about auxiliary cables which are not supplied 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 C 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Table C 1 lists the E A 232 D pin assignments for the modem Table C 1 EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Pin Name Da CCITT Saba Circuit Function 1 AA 101 Shield 2 TXD BA 103 DTE Transmit Data 3 RXD BB 104 DCE Receive Data 4 RTS CA 105 DTE Request to Send 5 CTS CB 106 DCE Clear to Send 6 DSR CC 107 DCE Data Set Ready 7 SG AB 102 Signal Ground 8 LSD CF 109 DCE Line Sig
214. lth and status information has been truncated because it overflowed system limits There is a large amount of health and status information in the subnetwork This information can be recovered by sending device health and status commands to specific modems Test Mode The modem or an upstream device is running a disruptive test Disabled The modem s DTE port has been disabled On Dial Backup The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode FW Downloading A firmware download is in progress On Lease Backup The modem is operating in Lease Backup mode This status occurs only if the Dual Lease Line is enabled Primary Line Bad The modem is currently operating on the 2 wire backup facility the Lease Lookback option is enabled and the modem does not detect continuity on the primary 4 wire leased lines Backup Line Good The modem is currently operating on the primary 4 wire leased facility with 2 wire leased lines selected as the backup facility the Backup Line Check option is enabled and the modem detects continuity on the 2 wire backup leased lines Data Blocked The modem s primary data path is blocked PSTN Test Fail The modem failed either the Dial Tone Detection or the Ring Tone Detection portion of the Call Test command 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 2
215. mber 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch Download Software The Download Software function sets parameters within the modem when transferring firmware to one or more modems or when receiving firmware upgrades from a locally attached PC based controller The latter is only performed by customer service personnel There are two selections under Download Software Clone Remote and To Local via DTE Clone Remote is used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently stored in a 391x Series modem to either one or more remote 391x Series modems or one or more DC attached 391x Series modems Remote modems must be connected to the local modem via a leased line network or an established dial line network If these prerequisites do not exist Clone Remote will not appear on the LCD The second selection appearing on the LCD is To Local via DTE This function permits firmware upgrades to be transferred to a 391x Series modem This type of download requires a locally attached PC controller to be connected to the modem s DTE port as well as special download software Any downloads using this selection are intended to be performed by customer service personnel only Selecting Clone Remote NOTE Clone Remote operations are not supported unless both local and remote modems are 391x Series modems The 3800 or 392x Series modems cannot be used in cloning operations with 391x Series modems To access DwnLoadSoftware from the Control
216. mes it is necessary to change operating parameters while the modems are online The Escape Sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data mode and online Command mode while maintaining a connection with the remote modem This is accomplished using the escape sequence to exit Data mode and the O command to return to Data mode Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is online and in Data mode The 391x Series modem uses three consecutive plus characters as the escape sequence To change this value refer to S Register S2 discussed in Table 14 3 in the S Register Format section To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded in data as an escape sequence the Escape Guard Time value determines the length of the pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The 391x Series modem uses a one second pause as the Escape Guard Time To change this value refer to S Register S12 discussed in Table 14 3 in the S Register Format section To enter online Command mode while in Data mode enter the following sequence TYPE 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Use the O command to return to Data mode from online Command mode Enter the following command TYPE ATO PRESS Enter Command Guidelines Review the following guidelines before using any AT Commands The escape sequence is used to enter online Comman
217. more choices are available to the right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Right Scroll Indicator The left right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left and right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Scroll Indicator lt The left scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left of what is currently displayed on the LCD Other indicators may turn on depending on existing conditions such as error detection informational alerts and warnings These indicators appear on the top or bottom line of the LCD Remote Mode Indicator D If the local 391x Series modem establishes a connection with the remote 391x Series modem via the Remote branch then J appears in the upper right corner of the LCD top line on both modems For more information on the Remote Mode indicator refer to Chapter 13 Remote Branch Out of Range Indicator Qj If an invalid threshold out of range is selected in the VF Threshold update process then B appears in the lower right corner of the LCD bottom line For more information on the Out of Range indicator refer to VF Thresholds Update in Chapter 7 Control Branch 3 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation Keypad The DCP on the Model 3910 has seven keys while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has eight keys The additional key on the carrier is the Select key used to connect the SDCP to a specific
218. mote indicating the modem is attempting to establish a Remote Cloning Download session with the remote modem If unsuccessful the modem remains in the Download Transfer mode The LCD s top line displays RemClone Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following messages Incompat Modulat The modems are connected but are using a modulation scheme other than V 33 V 32terbo V 32bis V 32 V 29 or TMp No Response The remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem or the connection between the two modems is poor 7 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch Access Disabled The remote modem s Access from Remote configuration is disabled Password Invalid The local and remote modems passwords do not match Correct the problem and attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative No Circuit There is no connection between the local and remote modem After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning Download session the following screens appear RemClone Status A initializing AJ E AE RemClone Status A CT A l e ea E As data banks are transferred the local and remote LCD s bottom line displays the status of the download process and the number of records sent versus the total number of records for that bank For Single download applications if the download is successful the local modem displays Remote Clone OK and
219. mote when using Remote mode Reset_Security Set_Orig_Secur Test Call_Setup Dial Backup only Dial A Answer A Change_Directory Disconnect A Dial_Standby A Directory_Status or Does not appear Return_to_DialA in North America Directory Locations 1 24 Z Self A Rem_Digital_Loop A Pattern A Abort A Loc_Analog_LoopA Loc_Digital_Loop A 3910 3911 Set_Access_Ctrl only only Admin Password Speaker Data_Stream Make_Busy Download_Code or DownloadSoftware RemoveMakeBUSy EditPassWdTable Reset EIA_LEDS Service_Line VF_Thresh_Update or Set_Answer_Sec DiscServLine from previous page lt V42 MNP Bufferm Test E Misc E Security W Err Contrl Mode DTE RL CT140 StrapsWhenDisc EntryWait_Time V42bis Compress MNP5 Compress EC Negotiat Bfr EC Fallbck Char Flw Cntl of DTE Flw Cntl of Mdm XON XOFF Psthru Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Break Buffr Ctl Send Break Cnil BuffrDiscDelay Max Frame Size RdcdAsyncBufSiz DTE LL CT141 Test Timeout Rev Remote Loop V54 Address V54 Device Type Speaker Control Speaker Volume Access frm Remt RemAccssPasswrd Dir 1_ Callback NMS_Call_Msgs NetworkPosition NetMngmtAddress Diag Connection Mixed Trib F W Link Delay sec VF_Prompt_Type DTE_PW_Tries DTE_PW_TermChar DTE_PW_BkSpChar Get_User_ID NMS_Reporting Answ_Secur_Mode Originate_Secur Does not appear in TMp Control mode Does not appear in Remote mode Self Loc_Di
220. mote modem is completed Invalid Command The modem cannot complete a command Messages listed in Table 3 5 are dial access security messages Table 3 5 Dial Access Security Messages Dial Access Security Message Indicates Get VF PsWd The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password Get DTE PsWd The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE VF PsWd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the originating dialer Unknown DTEpswd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the DTE passwords received from the remote DTE were invalid No Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial command did not contain an originate access password Unknown VF PsWd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the modem received an invalid VF password DTEpswd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE Inval Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate password in the AT dial command was not valid DTR Dial Blockd DTR dialing is not
221. ms originating a call To access Set Orig Sec from Set Access Ctrl make the following selections Set Access Ctrl A Set_Orig_Sec E gt Press the key until Set_Orig_Sec appears Select Set_Orig_Sec Table 12 3 describes the settings of the Set Originate Security group option Table 12 3 Set Originate Security Group Options Set Orig Sec No_OrigSec EnaOrigSec Set Originate Security Controls the security protection for origination of calls when AT commands are used NOTE The originate password must be included in all AT dial command strings if this option is enabled If not included or incorrectly entered the message ERROR is returned to the DTE No Originate Security Disables originate security so that a modem can originate a call using AT commands m Enable Originate Security When using AT commands the modem will only place a call if a valid password is entered along with an AT dial command If the password is not entered then ERROR is returned to the DTE and the dial command is canceled 12 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Set Admin PsWd Set Administrative Password is used to change the Administrative Password value The Administrative Password is an 8 digit decimal number that allows authorized users to enter the Access Security Control function NOTE If this value is forgotten then the only way to access any of the security func
222. n For Trellis Multipoint TMp modems control or tributary you must specify the remote access password of the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function The following display does not appear in point to point modems Choose Password a En tYYYYYYYY es lt BARG gt The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function To increment digits within the password field yyyyyyyy use the lt 1 and keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 ft key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function Select Channel A R A w eJ le J Select Channel lt aX BE data blckd A StHwy amp 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 13 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems If operation over the secondary channel is desired press any function key to select the secondary channel Secondary channel only appears if using V 32terbo V 32bis V 32 or TMp modulation If operation over the primary channel is desired press the key until primary displays and press any function key Primary channel operation is not available when initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem Online 14 4 r A Control ExitRem A a re r gt If the remote modem accepts the password an
223. n only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Automode The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem However the maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration option m System 85 Enables the full automode function with special provisions which are needed to work reliably in a System 85 or similar PBX modem pool NOTE When the V 32bis Automoding configuration option is enabled the V 21 protocol 0 300 bps is excluded from the Automoding sequence Instead the modem uses the Bell 103J protocol for 0 300 bps operation The AT command is S Register S78 n where nis 0 for Enable 1 for Disable and 2 for System 85 V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96 This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections m Start at 48 and Start at 96 Set the maximum connect rate for V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections The AT command is S Register S76 n where nis 0 for Enable 1 for Disable 2 for Start
224. n scheme The starting point of the menu tree that displays second level menu branches A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the telephone voice frequency line Advanced error correction coding technique for primary data typically used on higher speed modems This modulation scheme uses Forward Error Correction for multipoint and high speed point to point applications A unit that is under the control of another unit Underwriter s Laboratories Inc An organization which promotes product safety A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in a UNIX dial network A device connected logically closer to the host computer Universal Service Ordering Codes Generic telephone company service ordering codes An ITU T standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 1200 bps over the dial network PSTN 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Glossary 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems V 22bis V 25bis V 27bis V 29 V 32 V 32bis V 32terbo V 42 V 42bis V 54 VF XOFF XON An ITU T standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data at 1200 or 2400 bps over the dial network PSTN An ITU T standard dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing in asynchronous bisynchronous or HDLC modes An ITU T communications standard for modems operating in synchronous mode at 480
225. nal Detect 9 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 10 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 11 Unassigned 12 CT112 CI 112 DCE Data Signal Rate Select 13 Reserved for future function 14 Reserved for future function 15 TXC DB 114 DCE Transmit Clock 16 Reserved for future function 17 RXC DD 115 DCE Receive Clock 18 CT141 LL 141 DTE Local Loopback 20 DTR CD 108 DTE Data Terminal Ready 21 CT140 RL 140 DTE Remote Loopback 22 RI CE 125 DCE Ring Indicator 23 CT111 CH 111 DTE Data Rate Selector 24 XTXC DA 113 DTE External Clock 25 TEST TM 142 DCE Test Mode C 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Pin Assignments VF Connector Pin Assignments Table C 2 lists the connector pin assignments for Model 3910 modular jacks as well as the pin assignments for the TELCO jacks See Figure C 1 Table C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments Type of Telco Jack Pin Leased Dial Pi RJ11 JM8 TA 1 4 Wire TX Ring 1 2 Wire TX RX 2 4 Wire TX Tip 1 2 Wire TX RX 3 4 Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip Tip Tip 6 7 4 Wire RX Tip 8 4 Wire RX Ring PIN 2 RINE PIN 1 490 8769a PIN 8 Figure C 1 VF Pin Orientation 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 C 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied To add an external tel
226. nal Equipment Dialer Type Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE Disable Disables any type of DTE dialing method Dialing can only be performed using the DCP s Dial command or attached telephone AT Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands and dialing when used in an asynchronous application This is the only valid setting for leased line applications The modem will not respond to AT commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set to AT m V 25bis Async Selects V 25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem The character length must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit m V 25bis Bsync Selects V 25bis Bsync as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as character oriented protocol This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block The correct character structure for V 25bis Bsync dialing is 7 data bits Odd parity and 1 stop bit If the modem is in Asynchronous mode enter the following command string to configure it for V 25bis Bsync dialing AT amp F amp D1 amp S1 amp M233 amp W If the modem is already configured for synchronous operation perform the following to set the character format 1 use the modem s front panel to access the Async Sync Mode configuration option and set it to
227. nction allows the end user to retrieve and report any sequence faults to support personnel A sequence fault is an irregular or unexpected event There are two selections under Record Display and Clear Display allows up to eight sequence fault messages that have been recorded by the modem to be displayed on the LCD If no sequence faults have occurred then Modem O K appears Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages from nonvolatile memory and the LCD To access Record from the Status branch make the following selections Status lt A o Record A lt E gt 4 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Status Branch Press the key until Record appears Select Record Record Status A Display Clear A lt e2 F gt To display sequence faults select Display Record Number 1 A Modem O K a lt a re r gt The LCD displays the first sequence fault field Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are identified by a number in the upper right corner Press the gt key to view the remaining fields The message Modem O K appears if no sequence faults have occurred To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD and nonvolatile memory select Clear The message Modem O K appears To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the
228. nd mode for responses from the modem The AT command is S Register S4 n where nis a value from 0 to 127 Result Codes Enable Nxt Enable Disable EnablelnOrig This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Result codes are informational messages such as Connect and Ring sent from the modem and displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 14 1 in Chapter 14 AT Commands and S Registers m Enable Modem sends result codes to the DTE m Disable Modem does not send result codes to the DTE m Enable in Originate For UNIX applications enable result codes only on the originating modem This prevents the DTE on the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts The AT command for Enable is QO The AT command for Disable is Q1 The AT command for Enable in Originate mode is Q2 5 22 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 2 4 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options ExtendReslitCode Enable Nxt Enable Disable Add EC Add V42 MNP Use DTE_ Rate This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Extended Result Codes Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control are displayed with the result codes For a list of Extended Result Codes refer to Table 14 1 in Chapter 14 AT Commands and S Registers m Enable NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER and C
229. ndicating your location in the Top Level menu tree Appendix A To change a factory template from the Sync Leased preset configuration using the DCP perform the following steps 1 Press the function key below Configure to select the Configure branch The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm 2 Press the key until Factory comes into view then press the F1 key to display the factory preset configurations Factory preset configurations are Syne Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you must choose either Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode 3 Press the key until the appropriate factory preset template appears on the LCD and press the corresponding function key to select your choice For certain factory templates you will also need to choose the appropriate mode 4 Choose Function appears and displays the Edit and Save functions 5 Press the F3 key Save to save the new factory preset configuration to one of three configuration areas Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas The L
230. ndition after every call This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change the modem s operation for their particular call NOTE If Reload is selected the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code appears when the following commands are issued AT amp FO AT amp F1 AT amp F2 AT amp F3 AT amp F4 AT amp F5 AT amp FE AT amp F7 AT amp F8 AT amp WO AT amp W1 AT amp W2 and AT amp Zn x The AT command for the Straps When Disconnected configuration option is S Register S88 n where n is 0 or 231 for No_Change and 1 or 232 for Reload Speaker Control OnUntilCarr Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On Speaker Control Determines if the speaker is OFF ON until carrier signal is received by the modem or ON all the time NOTE Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings The AT command for Off is MO The AT command for On Until CD is M1 The AT command for On is M2 5 48 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 8 2 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Speaker Volume Medium Nxt Medium Low High Speaker Volume Controls the level of speaker volume NOTE Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume
231. ne feed CR LF Configure Edit DTE Dialer S65 Line Current Disconnect Register determines if the modem disconnects if an 8 millisecond or 90 millisecond interruption in loop current occurs Register has the following values 0 Enable 8msec 1 Enable 90msec 2 Disable The factory setting is Enable 8msec Configure Edit Line Dialer 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 3 8 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S66 NMS Call Messages Register determines if the modem sends information regarding status Call Progress and or sends summarized call statistics Call Connect to the 6700 Series Network Management System NMS Register has the following values 0 Call Connect amp Progress 1 Disable 2 Call Connect Only 3 Call Progress Only The factory setting is Call Connect amp Progress Configure Edit Misc S67 Directory Location 1 Callback Register determines if the modem uses the single number callback function Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Misc S69 Make Busy Via DTR Register determines if the modem goes off hook busy when DTR is OFF Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dial
232. nect it transmits a continuous space to the opposite modem before disconnecting A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to its origination point Used to test various portions of a data link in order to isolate an equipment or data line problem The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top Level menu and extending down to various device functions In a multipoint network several different data rates from tributary modems transmitters communicating with one control modem Microcom Networking Protocol Levels 2 4 of this protocol similar to ITU V 42 detect and correct data errors caused by telephone line noise and signal distortion Level 5 similar to ITU V 42bis includes data compression MOdulator DEModulator A device used to convert data from a digital signal to an analog signal so that data can be transmitted over a telephone line Once the data is received the analog signal is converted back into a digital signal The process of varying some characteristics usually amplitude frequency and or phase of a carrier wave to form data transmissions A device used to interleave or simultaneously transmit multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream Multiplexing techniques include FDM frequency division multiplexing TDM time division multiplexing and STDM statistical time division multiplexing A circuit connecting one control modem with one or more tributary modems
233. nector EIA 232 D ITU T V 24 MODEL 3910 POWER SUPPLY AC POWER REQUIREMENTS 100 to 250 Vac 50 to 60 Hz POWER CONSUMPTION Model 3910 6 watts typical including power supply speaker off Model 3911 4 watts typical each card Speaker consumption is approximately 1 watt at high volume DIMENSIONS Weight 2 5 pounds 1 14 kg Model 3910 without power supply 1 0 pounds 0 45 kg Model 3911 Height 2 1 inches 5 4 cm Model 3910 7 1 inches 18 1 cm Model 3911 Width 7 6 inches 19 4 cm Model 3910 0 9 inches 2 3 cm Model 3911 Depth 12 1 inches 30 8 cm Model 3910 13 4 inches 34 0 cm Model 3911 TRANSMIT LEVEL Leased Line North America Leased Line All Other Countries Dial Line North America Dial Line All Other Countries 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is 0 dBm 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is country dependent 10 through 32 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is Permissive 9 dBm Level setting is not accessible to the user Factory default is country dependent TELEPHONE INTERFACE Leased Line Connectivity Dial Line Connectivity JM8 Model 3910 50 pin mass termination Model 3911 RJ11C Permissive RJ21X Permissive 50 pin connector Model 3911 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 1 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 1 1 3 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifi
234. nication link and the remote modem Any data or pattern entered at the local DTE is sent to and returned from the remote modem For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode SENDS TEST MESSAGE RECEIVER TRANSMITTER DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK E RECEIVER lt LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM nir DTE INTERFACE TRANSMITTER VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE Figure 8 2 Remote Digital Loopback To access Rem Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test Z A Rem_Digital_Loop A 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 8 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Press the key until Rem_Digital_Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Remote Loop A Started A a fre F gt The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to Test in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the To
235. ning sequence but before normal connection The modems must be configured for asynchronous operation to use this type of security When using DTE side password entry the modems go through their normal training and error control negotiation Once complete the answering modem requests a valid password from the originating user The originating user must enter via the DTE a password that can consist of digits and case insensitive letters Note that DTE passwords can be from to 6 characters in length The answering modem verifies the password against its password database table and if valid completes the data connection thus allowing DTE data to be passed As with VF side password entry the answering modem must be a 3900 Series modem and the originating modem can be either a 3900 Series modem or any vendor s modem The following example illustrates the format of DTE side password TYPE abc 123 PRESS Enter Where abc123 is a 6 alphanumeric character number Characters used for DTE side passwords are case insensitive 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Combination of VF Side and DTE Side Passwords The previously described methods of password entry can be combined to provide two layers of security In this case the modems negotiate VF side password entry prior to training If successful the modems connect and then prompt the originating user for a valid password If correctly entered the mod
236. ntrol the flow of data from the DTE m XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem sends XON and XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop the flow of data The AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q5 and Q6 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q4 The AT commands for CTS to DTE are Q2 and Q3 Flw Cntl of Mdm RTS_to_Mdm Nxt RTS_to Mdm Disable XON XOFF This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of Modem Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem m RTS to Modem Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based upon the ON and OFF state of the DTE s RTS signal m Disable The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem m XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon XON and XOFF characters received from the DTE The AT commands for Disable are QO Q2 and Q4 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q5 The AT commands for RTS to Modem are Q3 and Q6 5 42 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 6 5 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options XON XOFF Psthru Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Flow Control of Modem is configured for XON XOFF
237. o modems connected back to back The AT command for Peripheral is S Register S54 0 The AT command for Intermediate is S Register S54 1 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 47 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Misc The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions including network management parameters and remote modem access Table 5 8 shows each Misc Miscellaneous configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 5 8 1 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options StrapsWhenDisc No_Change Nxt No Change Reload Straps When Disconnected Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications m No Change Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs m Reload The Active Operating configuration area which controls modem operation is reloaded from the Active Saved configuration area when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable to start the modem from a known co
238. ode V 32bis Autorate Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable V 32bis Override Disable Disable N A Disable Disable Disable Dial Transmit Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive Permissive Level 3 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm 9 dBm V 22bis Guard Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Tone V 32bis Train Long Long Long Long Long Long 1 This configuration option is country dependent 2 This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 3 Except in North America this configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options F 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 4 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options r s Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial e aa Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Leased Line Leased Mode 4 wire LL 4 wire LL 4 wire LL N A N A N A Answer Sync Answer Async Originate TMp Leased Answ Leased Answ Tributary or or 4 wire LL or 4 wire LL 4 wire LL Originate Sync Originate Answer TMp Leased Orig Async Leased Control Orig Leased Line Rate 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 TMp N A N A N A TMp Control or 14400 TMp TMp Tributary V 32bis Autorate Enable Enable N A N A N A N A V 32bis Override Disable Disable N A N A N A N A Le
239. odem s transmit output level is fixed at 9 dBm The telephone company assumes that the line loss is 3 dB and no compensation is provided for additional losses A Permissive mode telephone line is usually terminated with a USOC RJ11C jack Model 3910 Dial Backup Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the dial backup network interface 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface Model 3910 Leased Backup Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the 2 wire leased backup network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface 2 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation Network Management System Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the network management system interface 1 Insert the sub miniature 4 conductor modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device into the jack labeled NMS Figure 2 1 Refer to Document Number 3610 A2 GZ45 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F 3 300 Installation Instructions for a description of the 3600 Hubbing Device Installation for the 3910 is the same as for the 3610 DSU 2 Connect the
240. ol at 9 6 kbps tributaries at 9 6 or 7 2 kbps control at 7 2 kbps tributaries at 7 2 or 4 8 kbps control at 4 8 kbps tributaries at 4 8 or 2 4 kbps control at 2 4 kbps tributaries at 2 4 kbps Tributary rates will never exceed control rates If tributary and control rates are equal reducing the control rate will automatically reduce the tributary rate 19200 TMp 14400 TMp TX gt lt TIX DTE presse DTE Sync ai 3010 A Z 3010 B Sync Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 14400 TMp lt T 2a pel DTE 3910 C Sync Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 2 Sample Configuration Multipoint Configuration Options 3910 A Use TMp Control default configuration options 3910 B Use TMp Trib default configuration options 3910 C Use TMp Trib default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EI A 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 G 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup Figure G 3 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with automatic dial backup Cable 3 eB Cable
241. ommunications Union The telecommunications agency of the United Nations established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices Before March 1993 it was called CCITT The Telecommunications Standardization Sector of the International Telecommunications Union an advisory committee established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies Before March 1993 it was called CCITT A jack used for leased line networks Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8 are the receive pair Kilobits per second One kilobit is usually taken to be 1 024 bits A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP s LCD These keys are used to select configuration options and to maneuver through the DCP menu Liquid Crystal Display Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that messages can be displayed A private line connection exclusively for the user No dialing is necessary Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g an alarm The physical connection between one location and another used for data transmission A test in which the modem s transmit voice frequency VF signal is looped to its receiver A disconnect effected when the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem When a modem is commanded to discon
242. on dial networks in a Dial Backup mode Test yellow The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible EC green The modem is in Error Control mode Diagnostic Control Panel Operation The 391x Series modem s diagnostic control panel DCP is the user interface to all functions used to configure and control the modem In addition to the status LEDs this interface includes the liquid crystal display LCD and keypad Figure 3 3 LCD TOP LINE HIDDEN CHOICE INDICATOR MOVES UP ONE RETURNS Fe TEENS Leased 19 2 Der ae DISPLAY Status Configure MENU LEFT RIGHT SCROLL SCROLL KEY KEY FUNCTION KEYS LCD BOTTOM LINE Figure 3 3 391x Series LCD and Keypad 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems LCD Display The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line with each displaying a maximum of 16 characters at a time If more information is available on the LCD than what is currently displayed an indicator appears in the top right or bottom right hand corner of the LCD Use the lt or key to scroll in the indicated direction to display more selections onto the LCD Hidden Choice Indicators Other Indicators The hidden choice indicators serve as an alert that other choices are available besides what is currently displaying on the LCD These indicators appear as one of the following symbols Right Scroll Indicator gt The right scroll indicator appears when
243. on Options sections of this chapter The COMSPHERE 391x Series modem uses an outbound and inbound method of security known respectively as Originate Access and Answer Access security Both methods of security require some type of password entry whether it be included as part of an AT command dial string or entered directly from a remote user s DTE 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Originate Access Security Originate Access lets you control who can originate a call from a local modem via the AT command set This is useful in LAN and modem pooling applications With Originate Access security a local user s password is embedded in the AT dial command If the password is valid the user can dial out using this modem The following example illustrates the format for an Originate Access password ATD abc123 T9 8005551234 Where ATD is the AT dial command string Percent is the start and stop AT command string interrupt character The password must be embedded in these characters abc123 is the 6 alphanumeric character originate password T is the Tone DTMF dial modifier Comma is the pause dial modifier 98005551234 is the phone number Originate Access Security is enabled or disabled by the Set Originate Security group Answer Access Security The other method of security which is the primary focus of this chapter is Answer Access Answer Access allows the answering modem to r
244. on at 12 000 bps with error control 24 13 CONNECT 14400 EC Connection at 14 400 bps with error control 25 17 CONNECT 16800 EC Connection at 16 800 bps with error control 26 15 CONNECT 7200 EC Connection at 7200 bps with error control 27 5 CONNECT 1200 EC Connection at 1200 bps with error control Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate This 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 1 2 of 2 Result Codes Se S e Word Description 28 28 CONNECT 38400 Connection at 38 400 bps 29 14 CONNECT 19200 EC Connection at 19 200 bps with error control 30 30 CONNECT 57600 Connection at 57 600 bps 77 77 FORBIDDEN Forbidden number 78 78 DELAYED Delayed number Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate This displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration
245. one Remote Operation on page 7 12 which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations A tributary modem configured for extended diagnostics Diagnostic Connection configuration option set to Modem DC can perform two types of Remote Clone operations It can clone the upstream VF connected control modem SC_Clone or it can clone all the 391x modems attached to its downstream Diagnostic Channel DC_Broadcast Choose DLL Type gt A SC_Clone A lt ED EE gt From the Choose DLL Type screen press the F1 key to select SC_Clone to request the transfer of an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the VF connected control modem Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Cloning DC Broadcast Remote Before using Clone Remote in DC Broadcast configurations make sure the tributary modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the control modems that receive the download refer to Chapter 6 Poll List Branch and ensure that the control modems are responding properly to polls refer to Chapter 9 Sub Network Health and Status Branch Choose DLL Type gt xa n A B jle we 7 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch From the Choose DLL Type screen press the key until DC_Broadcast appea
246. onfiguration branch The setting of this option can only be changed in the Set Answer Sec group found in the Security branch No Answer Security Disables the dial access security feature DTE Only The answering modem is enabled for security The originating user must supply a password when prompted 12 14 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Dial Access Security Table 12 4 3 of 3 Security Configuration Options m VF amp DTE The answering modem is enabled for security The modems negotiate security using the VF side password entry technique protocol If successful and the Password Type for this particular VF password is set for VF_ amp DTE a password is requested from the originating user If successful the modems connect and can pass data NOTE The settings of this configuration option determine the type of access security protection provided by the modem It can be disabled using the No_Answ_Sec setting or it can be enabled with the DTE_Only or VF_ amp _DTE settings Originate_Secur No_OrigSec End No _OrigSec Ena_Orig_Sec Originate Security Mode This configuration option is read only and cannot be changed from the Configuration branch The setting of this configuration option can only be changed in the Set Orig Sec group found in the Security branch No Originate Security Disables originate security so that a modem can originate a call using AT commands m Enable Originate Security When using
247. option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears AT Command List AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE such as a PC and control the modem s operation and software configuration AT commands are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT Refer to the amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 14 2 lists all AT commands supported by the 391x Series modem The first column lists the AT command The second column defines and lists all possible values for that command The Async Dial factory default is listed in bold The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent DCP command Use this to reference commands in Chapters 4 through 12 if further description is necessary AT Command Format AT commands are entered in Command mode using the following format TYPE ATXn Where X is the AT command and n is the specific value for that command PRESS Enter In Table 14 2 the value for X is listed in the AT Command column and the value for n is listed in the Description column 14 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 1 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Al Repeat Last Command Reexecutes last command string Not to be Call Setup preceded with AT or followed by pressing the
248. or Dial and the modulation scheme used by the modem A part of the device s memory that holds stored values Files devices and users not attached to your local DTE A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem the remote modem and the circuit between them An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that the device sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command Glossary 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Glossary Return to Dial RJ11 RJ21 SDCP SDU secondary channel Select key serial transmission slot S registers SubHS Sync Dial synchronous transmission TDM TMp Top Level menu training trellis coded modulation tributary unit UL UNIX Dial upstream modem USOC V 22 A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to dial line operation when currently on leased lines A type of 6 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone sets A type of 50 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines Shared Diagnostic Control Panel A feature that allows carrier mounted devices to share the same diagnostic control panel Installed into one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier it controls and monitors the devices in all the carriers in the cabinet A single SDCP can control up to 8 carriers with a total of 12
249. or using NMS Circular The modem dials the number in directory location 1 If the call fails the modem calls the number in successive directory locations until it is successful Upon reaching directory location 24 or the first empty directory location the modem repeats the process starting with directory location 1 The AT command is S Register S46 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for Enable and 2 for Circular 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 35 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 5 4 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options AutoDialStandby Disable Nxt Disable 15min thr 4hr Test 2min Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 hr TestAdv2min This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Control Automatic Dial Standby Permits a modem operating on dial lines regardless of the method of dialing origination to check the quality of the leased lines periodically and if they are good to disconnect from the dial lines and resume operations on the leased lines The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option These intervals are 15 minutes 1 hour and 4 hours The Test 2min and TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only The Adv 15min Adv 30min and Adv 1 hr selections cause the modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non disruptive to the d
250. orate dial line leased line Override dial line leased line Train Time dial line V 42 error control 5 39 V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options group 5 3845 45 V 42bis data compression 5 40 Address 5 47 Device Type 5 47 VF connection B 41B 5 interface requirements pin assi enments C 3 status 4 544 6 VF rate dial line leased line VF Thresholds Update 17 13 17 16 weight 1 9 XON XOFF Passthrough 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Index 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Index 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40
251. ork management system connection 2 5 dial 2 4 Network Position Identification leased 3 i NMS Call Messages Linie Curent Disconnegi No Answer Abort Timeout Line Dialer configuration options group 5 2545 29 Line Feed Character Link Delay Seconds Load Number LN No Carrier Disconnect No Data Disconnect local loopback 5 46 Long Space Disconnect 5 27 long space disconnect O loopback operating modes DTE Local AT commands Talk Data 3 8 11 1 operational messages 3 83 14 Options Status branch local digital options strap See configuration options remote digital originate access security 12 2 12 16 I2 17 LSD Control 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 Index 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems part numbers 4 6 passwords administrative 12 5412 6 remote access 5 5 15 8 5 49 13 2 13 3J 13 4 13 5 security 12 2412 4 12 16 12 17 pattern test 8 74 8 10 pause time for comma in dial string phone See telephone external phone numbers See telephone numbers pin assignments C 2 PList Poll List branch 3 8 J6 1 J6 6 Poll List acquiring adding to 6 5 displaying maximums power consumption 1 9 power supply connection 2 5 power up self test 2 5 public switched telephone network PSTN See dial rates automatic control dial line 5 31 leased line 5 35 dial linej 1 10J5 301 14 17_ leased lin
252. ormally the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR to CTS delay common for V 32bis modulation or when dial access security is enabled and requires a DTE side password entry Often the DTE cannot accept the long delay between DSR and CTS turning ON due to the remote user entering the DTE side password The AT command for Forced On is amp SO The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp S1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp S2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp S3 The AT command for On Early is amp S4 The AT command for Delay to Data is amp S5 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 5 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options RTS Action Stndrd_RS232 Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Ignore Sim _Cntl_Car Cntl_Car Request to Send Action RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send m Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal ElA 232 D operation RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the modem m Ignore Modem assumes RTS is always ON Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem Simulated Control Carrier RTS input controls the remote modem s LSD signal This is used for DTEs that require Line Signal Detect LSD to toggle ON and OFF to simulate half duplex operation If RTS Action is set to simulated control carrie
253. ormat Valid format consists of 8 data bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even odd mark or space parity Verify that the DTE s data rate is supported by the modem Refer to the Async DTE Rate configuration option in DTE Interface in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration If using a PC verify that the modem is attached to the correct communications port 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 B 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table B 5 1 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action The modem does not receive a dial tone Attach a telephone directly to the telephone line to verify that a dial tone exists Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem s rear jack labeled DIAL The modem does not go off hook and answer an incoming call Verify that the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is set to a value other than 0 disable Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem verify that the modem s DTR Action configuration option is set for Ignore Refer to DTE Interface in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the modem The modem goes off hook answers but does not connect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE is echoed back to the DTE Verify that the originating
254. ose Address TMp Control only Choose Password TMp only Not in TMp Trib Secondary Prim data bickd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using Remote Mode 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 13 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The e e following conditions must be met before using the Remote branch A connection using either leased lines or the dial network must be established The Access from the Remote configuration option must be enabled in the remote modem In point to point networks the Remote Access Password configuration option must be the same for both the local and remote modems In multipoint networks the remote access password must be entered at the appropriate prompt For multipoint control modems the network management address of the tributary modem must be entered at the appropriate prompt Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the primary or secondary channel if available of the VF line Using the primary channel gives a much faster response time due to the higher data rate but it also interrupts data flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode is active Once Remote mode is terminated the primary channel is automatically made available for data transmission Unlike primary channel communications the secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and does not interrupt data flow V 32terbo V 32bis V 32 and TMp are the only modulations available for the se
255. ot necessary to power down the carrier to remove and replace a Model 3911 modem Perform the following steps 1 Rotate the circuit pack lock until the release tab is exposed 2 Press down on the release tab and pull the modem away from the carrier s backplane 2 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview DCP Operation This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic control panel DCP of the 391x Series modem It also describes how to select and use each branch of the Top Level menu tree Diagnostic Control Panels There are two types of diagnostic control panels DCP the DCP on the standalone Model 3910 modems and the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature used with the Model 3911 installed into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Both DCPs have a two line 32 character liquid crystal display LCD and keypad through which Top Level menu branches are accessed to perform the following Check modem status Set up configuration options Initiate diagnostic tests Initiate and disconnect dial operations Access remote modems through the local modem s DCP The LCD displays the result of any command initiated using the DCP Most of these operations can be performed from an attached asynchronous DTE using the AT command set 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Model 3910 Diagnostic Control Panel The diagnostic control panel DCP of the Model 3910 modem Figur
256. outing of data through the network The capability to transmit in two directions simultaneously One of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or scroll to an LCD entry Function keys are labeled F1 F2 and F3 The capability to transmit in two directions but not simultaneously The exchange of predetermined codes and signals tones to establish a connection between two modems During handshaking the modems determine the modulation rate and type of error control they will use High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by the International Standards Organization ISO A symbol appearing in the upper right hand corner of the LCD indicating that more selections are available than what appears on the LCD A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the network Hertz A unit of frequency that equals one cycle per second A state in which the modem s configuration options can be modified or commands can be issued to the modem using AT commands Glossary 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Glossary interface ITU ITU T JM8 kbps keypad LCD leased line LED link local analog loopback long space disconnect loopback menu tree mixed inbound rates MNP modem modulation multiplexer mux multipoint line network network management address A shared boundary between functional units International Telec
257. over cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Sample Configurations Extended Diagnostics Figure G 7 shows a sample configuration for extended diagnostics Cable 5 Cable 6 Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 DC Out DC In Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 DTE Sync Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 DTE Syne yee Cable 2 Cable 2 494 1 4593 Figure G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics Configuration Options 3910 A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Network position Set to Control 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception TX Clock Source Set to External Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC 3910 C Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External Extended Channel Set to Enable Upstream Port Set to Port 1 Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC Network Position Set to Continue 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 G 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Cables Adapter 3910 D F H 3910 E G Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Cable 6 Cable 7 871A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC_Loop Use Sync Leased Answer default confi
258. p Level menu 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 13 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 13 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and ee 4 Overview The AT command set provides an alternative method to the modem s DCP for entering commands that control the operation and configuration of the 391x Series modems This chapter discusses guidelines necessary to operate AT commands as well as listing the modifiers for all AT commands supported by the 391x Series modems AT commands are issued from asynchronous DTEs Operating Modes The 391x Series modem has two operating modes Command mode and Data mode Before a modem goes online establishes a successful connection with a remote modem it is considered to be in Command mode an idle state where you can modify its operating parameters or issue modem commands Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either words or digits known as Result Codes Refer to Table 14 1 for a listing of result codes Once the modems are online either by answering or originating a call they automatically switch to Data mode Data mode is a state where any entries made from the DTE are considered data and are transmitted and received between modems The modems remain in Data mode until the connection is broken or until they are forced into online Command mode using the escape sequence Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode Someti
259. p Level menu press the A key Loc Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and forces it to loopback any data received from the remote modem Figure 8 3 This test operates the same as a ITU T V 54 Loop 2 except it is issued at your modem This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating a remote digital loopback from its location For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode TRANSMITTER DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM 491 13078 Figure 8 3 Local Digital Loopback To access Loc Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections 8 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Test Branch Pattern Test a A o Rea A Le W Le wo Press the key until Loc_Digital_Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Digitl Loop es kaa A ea er r ro gt The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the display If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to Test in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration To exit this
260. pback 0 0 0 eects 8 4 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 0 00008 8 5 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test 00 02 e eee eee eee 8 6 End to End Pattern Test 0 0 0 eee ee 10 1 Dial Backup 0sc 0 een tid tee ar ee ae ea ane pe ee C l VE Pin Orientations sesia ede Maa ea ea a eae C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External Telephone C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover Cable 0 000000 eee eee eee G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee G 2 Sample Configuration Multipoint 0 0 eee eee G 3 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management G 5 Sample Configuration Carrier with Network Management G 6 Sample Configuration Extended Multipoint 000 000 G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics 0000 e ee eee 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 v COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank vi September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Table of Contents List of Tables Table Page 1 1 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems 00004 3 1 Model 3910 and Model 3911 DCP LEDs 0 0 0
261. pear when the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines Table 5 5 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 5 5 1 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options Leased Mode 4WLL Ans Nxt 4WLL Ans 4WLL Orig 2WLL Orig 2WLL Ans Leased Mode Sets the modem for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Answer mode receiving a call or 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Originate initiating a call mode NOTE For proper operation of V 32 modulations over leased lines one modem must be set to Originate mode and the other set to Answer mode For Sync Leased Answer Mode Async Leased Answer Mode and Trellis Multipoint Tributary Mode 4 wire Answer is the factory default For Sync Leased Originate Mode Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis Multipoint Control Mode 4 wire Originate is the factory default The AT command for Disable is amp LO The AT command for 2 wire Originate is amp L1 The AT command for 4 wire Originate is amp L2 The AT command for 2 wire Answer is amp L3 The AT command for 4 wire Answer is amp L4
262. permitted when security is enabled This message appears if DTR dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled SecurityBlocked The access verification capabilities are not available and the modem does not pass data to the DTE under any circumstances This message appears only when the modem is in base mode a mode that occurs during a firmware download and Answer Access Security is enabled 3 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Operation The Top Level menu s main branches appear on the LCD in the order of Status Configure PList Control Test SubHS Call Setup Talk Data Security and Remote These branches are described in detail in Chapters 4 through 13 Quick Configuration Display The Quick Configuration display indicates the basic operational characteristics of the modem Leased 19 2 a A Eee R A ED m r r gt To access the Quick Configuration display from the Top Level display press the lt 1 key eee oe 7 YAS abbb cdd ee fff a er re 3 gt 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The modem s Quick Configuration information appears on the LCD s bottom line bbb dd ee ffff Displays the network position of the modem The letter C indicates this is a control modem and T indicates this is a tributary modem Displays the network management address of the modem
263. prietary 1200 device option is installed Leased Tx Level The factory default setting is country dependent It is 0 dBm in North America Nxt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Leased Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over leased lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to 15 dBm NOTE The leased TX level is limited to 1 dBm in all countries except North America The AT command is S Register S45 n where nis from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to 15 dBm Auto Dial Back Disable Nxt Disable Enable Circular This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Control Automatic Dial Backup Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail NOTE In point to point applications this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote modem The answering modem must have its Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto Answer NOTE When this configuration option is enabled the originating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of 10 call attempts with a 2 minute delay between calls This function can be reset with a completed manual dial backup a power cycle
264. propriate wiring options e 2 wire operations e 4 wire operations w o TEK leads e 4 wire operations with TEK leads TEK leads are for loopback purposes A 50 pin version is being considered for multiple line connections 8 POSITION PLUG PIN NO 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO oar U N gt Figure C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 C 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To connect a Model 3910 port to another modem s EJA 232 D interface use a 25 pin crossover cable Figure C 4 25 POSITION 25 POSITION PLUG PIN NO PLUG PIN NO 1 1 TXD 2 2 TXD RXD 3 3 RXD RTS 4 4 RTS 5 5 DSR 6 6 DSR sG 7 7 SG LSD 8 8 LSD 9 9 0 0 RXC RXC DTR DTR XTXC XTXC Figure C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover Cable C 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ITU T V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses Overview This appendix describes V 25bis dialing commands and responses ITU T V 25bis is an international dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in either Asynchronous Bisynchronous or HDLC operating mode The 391x Series modems support V 25bis request and answer commands As commands are entered from the DTE the 391x Series modems issue a response to the DTE which indicates if the call failed or connected or if the command is valid or invalid The following sections discuss those
265. ption is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines parity of the async character Asyn Stop Bits 1 Nxt 1 2 This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 3 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options DTR Action Ignore Nxt Ignore Stndrd_RS232 CntrlsOnHook CntrisTxMute Data Terminal Ready Action DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and ready for operation m Ignore Modem assumes DTR is always ON This is used when the DTE does not pro
266. ptions straps which determine how the modem operates These configuration options are accessed by scrolling down and across various levels of the Configure branch Le Configure Ld EditArea frm Activ Operating Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Factory Sync_Leased TMp Sync_Dial Async_Leased Async_Dial UNIX_Dial Choose Mode Choose Mode Control Trib Answer Originate Choose Function Edit StrapGroup Save Active Saved Customer Customer2 Async only DTE_Interface Line_Dialer Leased_Line Test Security DTE_Dialer Dial_Line V42 MNP Buffer Misc 5 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration The Configure branch consists of the following three levels e Ld EditArea frm Allows the selection of the Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory configuration areas e Choose Function Allows you to make changes Edit to existing configuration options or write Save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 e Edit Strap Group Contains the eight software configuration option groups that determine how the modem operates plus the Security group which can be viewed but not changed using this branch Editing and Saving a Configuration Option The following example shows how to change the Remote Access Password using the DCP If you intend to access another
267. r then the remote modem s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulated Control Carrier Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V 13 specifications This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS CTS flow control is selected m Control Carrier Allows the DTE s RTS signal to control the modem s carrier signal When RTS is ON carrier is present on the VF line When RTS turns OFF carrier is not present This is only valid for V 29 and V 27bis leased line modulations Auto Dial Backup is always disabled for this setting The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp RO The AT command for Ignore is amp R1 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp R2 The AT command for Control Carrier is amp R3 RTS Antistream 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 30sec 1min 2min 3min 5min This configuration option only appears in TMp Tributary mode or if RTS_Action is configured for Cntl_ Car V 29 and V 27bis Request to Send Antistreaming If enabled the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows If RTS is ON for a period exceeding the selected time the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force it OFF The modem will also force CTS OFF during this time This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF After this the next time the DTE turns RTS ON carrier will be turned ON and the RTS timer will start again Disable The antistreaming function is not in
268. r BufferMode V42MNPorBuf MNP_or_Buffr and LAPM_or_Bufr mode Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size When enabled the modem s buffer size is limited to a maximum of 20 characters The AT command is S Register S97 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 45 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Test The Test configuration options determine specifics such as the duration of a test for the various diagnostic tests available to the modem Table 5 7 shows each Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 5 7 1 of 2 Test Configuration Options DTE RL CT140 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Remote Loopback Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA 232 D ITU T V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote loopback An Abort command or test timeout ends this test This configuration option is not available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp m Enable The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 ITU T 140 is turned ON Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped m Disable The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in re
269. r TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Transmit Preemphasis Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line attenuation The AT command is S Register S96 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 37 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 5 6 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options Lease _Lookback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Lease Lookback While operating on backup lines this configuration option allows the modem to test the primary 4 wire leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth This test of the primary lines will not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends Dual_Leased_Ln Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is installed Dual Leased Line Allows the 2 wire backup facility to function as a 2 wire leased line facility When this configuration option is disabled the backup facility is a 2 wire dial line NOTE Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup NOTE Once the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option is enabled the Bakup_TXClk_Src configuration option can be
270. r tone Idle 19 2 A Tlk Data When you hear this tone immediately select Tlk Data and hang up the handset This starts the handshaking sequence between your modem and the remote modem oana A Call_Setup A Le LeJ Ls If this is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD 11 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Talk Data Branch Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual Answer NOTE On both modems the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration must be set to Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Manual Answer perform the following procedure Once the remote telephone is answered by the remote user you must both decide when to place the modems into Data mode You must both select Tlk Data at approximately the same time and hang up the handset to begin the handshaking sequence If the handshake is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD NOTE If the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem then the remote user must consult that modem s operator s manual to perform a similar operation Once the modems are online the status messages listed in Table 3 3 in Chapter 3 DCP Operation
271. range of allowable values of some configuration options is restricted The modem will accept any selection but it will set the configuration option to the closest legal value The actual value that is accepted by the modem is displayed when the F2 key is pressed to enter a selection The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA 232 D ITU T V 24 and asynchronous character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data between the DTE and the modem Table 5 1 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 1 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Async Sync Mode Sync Nxt Sync Async Asynchronous Synchronous Mode Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous mode If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set to Sync then the modem operates in Async mode when offline For Async Dial Async Leased and UNIX Dial Async is the factory default The AT commands for Async Mode are amp MO or amp QO The
272. ration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by the value held in S Register S8 WwW Wait for tone dial The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R modifier must be the last character in the dial string Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status message Hook flash Causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Causes the modem to return to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Space Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability End of Number Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator 10 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Call Setup Branch Directory Status Does Not Appear in North America Directory Status displa
273. re EIA LEDs branch is masked Make Busy Remove Make Busy The Make Busy function forces the modem off hook so it cannot answer a call This is often used with PBX systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or hunt groups WARNING To prevent violations of FCC and DOC regulations this function must only be used behind a user s PBX To access Make Busy from the Control branch make the following selections Control A ae A E e r gt Press the key until Make_Busy appears Select Make Busy Make Busy A Command ee A lt a re r gt The modem is now in a forced busy condition Command Complete appears on the LCD 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To remove the modem from Make Busy mode press the A key once and the gt key until RemoveMakeBusy appears Control ms A TETA A e BJ l we Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy The message Command Complete appears on the LCD Service Line Disconnect Service Line The Service Line function allows you to switch a specific Model 3911 installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier from normal leased or dial operation to service line operation This switch only places the modem on the service line For a connection to be established you must still use the normal dialing methods as described in Chapter 10
274. re the 391x Series modems have an established leased line connection using the Trellis Multipoint TMp modulation refer to Leased Line in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration e Make sure the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to Misc in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems e For Single download configurations know the remote access password and the network management address of the remote tributary modem that will receive the download Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the remote access password RemAccssPasswrd configuration option and the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option e For Multiple download configurations ensure that the control modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the remote tributary modems that will receive the download refer to Chapter 6 Poll List Branch and ensure that the tributaries are responding properly to polls refer to Chapter 9 Sub Network Health and Status Branch Cloning a Single TMp Remote Choose DLL Type gt A Single Multiple A 2800S Press the F1 key to select Single Clone Remote Choose Address mayen TXXx Res a Le gt The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem that will receive the download The valid address field range
275. red Security The Security configuration options allow you to set the parameters that control how a dial access security password is entered For security configuration options refer to Chapter 12 Dial Access Security 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 51 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 5 52 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Poll List Branch 6 Overview The Poll List function is not available on Point to Point control modems or Multipoint Tributary modems The Poll List Plist branch of the Top Level menu allows you to identify downstream modems in order to support health and status polling and download broadcasting The maximum number of devices is 16 on the secondary channel and 64 on the diagnostic channel Tributary only Display Clear Change Add Acquire Active Delete Skip 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 6 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Display To access PList from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A PList Baal A lt a le e gt Press the key until PList appears Select PList Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address for polling functions Each tributary modem must have a different network management address Refer to Misc in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration for a descrip
276. result Return_to_Dial appears on the LCD instead of Dial Standby Call Setup A Return_to_Dial If the primary leased line is unacceptable select Return_to_Dial which switches the modem back to backup network operation LCD displays Dial Standby If however the primary leased line is operating properly select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch to drop the dial backup connection Also if the primary leased line operation is maintained uninterrupted for the amount of time specified in the Dial Standby configuration option the dial backup network disconnects 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 10 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Dial Standby Hrd amp Press the key until Dial Standby or Return_to_Dial appears Select the appropriate function Dial Standby A Command TTA A a r r gt If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode the Dial Standby function forces the modem to primary leased lines and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode Return_to_Dial appears on the LCD Selecting this function forces the modem to the backup network and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete Change Directory Change Directory allows you to enter or modify telephone numbers The modem has nonvo
277. rs Press F1 or F2 to transfer an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the DC connected control modem s using the Active Poll list Proceed to Implementing a Clone Remote Operation on page 7 12 which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Viewing DC Broadcast Clone Results Choose DLL Type gt A eae A Le LeJ Ls From the Choose DLL Type screen press the key until DC_CloneResults appears to view the results of the last DC_Broadcast clone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated DC Clone Results A Nxt XXX A A lt a ro gt The address field xxx displays the network management address of one of the remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations A Trellis Multipoint TMp control modem can be used to download firmware to just one tributary modem Single or to all of its tributary modems Multiple NOTE A Trellis Multipoint TMp tributary modem cannot download firmware to its control modem To download firmware to a TMp control modem use a point to point dial connection an NMS or a PC controller Before using Clone Remote in multipoint configurations Single or Multiple perform the following e Make su
278. s 3911 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 4 Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet G 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Sample Configurations Extended Multipoint Figure G 6 shows a sample configuration for extended multipoint applications 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 4800 z w 4800 DTE 4800 1 Leased Syne DTE ry 5 A ry te Sync 4800 ae oe ry A 4800 DTE 4800 Sync Cable 2 Cable 2 4800 DTE Cable1 Cable1 _ Sync Cable1 Cable1 Cable1 Cable 1 4800 Cable1 Cable 5 i 4800 TMp 4800 TMp us z Leased T DTE 3910 A i 3910 B Syne Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 4800 TMp lt lt TX DTE 3910 C Sync
279. s and DCP status indicators light NOTE For tributary modems only the test is delayed 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate upstream before the VF channel is interrupted by the test If the modem passes the self test Pass appears on the LCD If it fails Failed appears If the modem fails contact your service representative If Invalid Command appears on the LCD the modem is operating on dial lines or another test is in progress If another test is in progress select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the modem is operating on dial lines disconnect to clear the dial lines and then choose Self If the modem receives a ring signal during this test the test is canceled and the RI Abort message appears To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 8 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Loc Analog Loop Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback ITU T V 54 Loop 3 Figure 8 1 that verifies modem operation as well as the connection between the DTE and modem The modem must be offline and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode to perform this test otherwise Invalid Command appears SENDS TEST MESSAGE TRANSMITTER DTE INTERFACE RECEIVER VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE NETWORK LOCAL MODEM 491 13076 Figure 8 1
280. s that have a value of one Private Branch Exchange Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of 9 dBm It is one of two possible modes of operation for modems connected to dial lines see programmable interface A rapid or repeated shifting of the relative phase of a signal resulting in unwanted distortion The diagnostic address of a control device derived from its location in the carrier its carrier and slot number A line or circuit connecting two stations A list containing the network management addresses of downstream modems Plain Old Telephone Service Standard telephone service over the PSTN with an analog bandwidth of less than 4 KHz A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a reset is initiated A set of rules that determines the behavior of devices in achieving and maintaining communication Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known as dial network An informative display screen available from the modem s Top Level display It provides such information as network position control or tributary network management address DTE mode Asynchronous or Synchronous Line mode Leased Answer Leased Originate
281. s used to perform a backspace in security mode This character can be set to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 Get_User_ID Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec Get User ID Only applicable when using network management This configuration option is used for security auditing only and is not part of the modem s normal security verification process Disable The remote user is not prompted for a User ID m Enable The remote user is prompted for a User ID once the handshaking and error control negotiation if applicable are complete There is no equivalent AT command NMS_Reporting 00 Nxt f 00 This configuration option does not appear if Answer Security Mode is configured for No_Answ_Sec NMS Reporting Only applicable when using network management Determines how and if security event information is reported to the 6700 Series NMS This information can be collected to build an audit trail of successful and unsuccessful connections Values for this configuration option range from 00 15 NOTE If not using the 6700 Series NMS or if using 6800 Series NMS this configuration option should remain at its default setting of 00 There is no equivalent AT command Answ_Secur_Mode No_Answ_Sec Nxt No _Answ_Sec DTE Only VF_ amp _ DTE Answer Access Security Mode This configuration option is read only and cannot be changed from the C
282. se selections e If no changes have been made and the A key is pressed the LCD returns to the Top Level menu e If changes have been made and the A or key is pressed then Save Edit appears on the LCD Table 12 1 describes the settings of the Edit Table Password group options Table 12 1 1 of 2 Edit Password Table Group Options PsWdType xxxx Nxt Cleared DTE_Entry VF_Entry VF_plus DTE Password Type Indicates whether this index location is configured for VF side password DTE side password or both Cleared displays for an index location that contains no valid entry Note that this configuration option only identifies the type of password used For proper operation the type of password selected must be consistent with the type of security used Refer to the Set Answer Security group option found later in this chapter Cleared Indicates that the index location does not contain any valid selections and is currently unused DTE Entry Indicates that this index s password is configured for DTE side password entry Special requirements apply when using DTE passwords if the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode is set to VF_ amp _DTE Refer to the note following VF plus DTE m VF Entry Indicates that this index s password is configured for VF side password entry This selection requires that the Set Answer Security option Answer Security mode be set to VF_ amp _DTE 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 19
283. selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 5 38 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 6 1 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Err Contrl Mode V42 MNPorBfr Nxt V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP_or_Buffr MNP _or Disc BufferMode DirectMode LAPM_or_ Disc LAPM_or_Bufr This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Error Control Mode Determines the type of error control used by the modem In most cases V42 MNPorBfr is the best choice If V 42bis and MNP are enabled then the modem uses the following priority for error control negotiation V 42bis V 42 MNP 5 and below Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs m V 42 MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 Link Access Procedure for Modems LAPM protocol If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation This is also known as V42 MNP Autoreliable Mode m V 42 MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 LAPM protocol If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode m MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects
284. sponse to the signal on Pin 21 The AT command is S Register S51 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DTE LL C1141 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Local Loopback Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D ITU T V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local loopback An Abort command or test timeout ends this test m Enable The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 ITU T 141 is turned ON Local loopback ends when the signal is dropped Disable The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18 The AT command is S Register S52 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 5 46 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 7 2 of 2 Test Configuration Options Test Timeout Disable Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec Test Timeout Determines how long a test runs before aborting Disable Allows a test to run indefinitely m 30 60 or 240 seconds Allows the test to run for 30 seconds 60 seconds or 240 seconds The AT command is S Register S18 n where nis 0 for Disable and 1 to 255 seconds Rev Remote Loop Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is not available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp Receive Remote Loopback Response Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued from a remote modem The AT command for Enable is amp T4 The AT command for Disable
285. stration Number See label on modem Listed to UL 1950 Recognized to UL 1950 Certified to CSA C22 2 No 950 M89 Certified as a component to CSA C22 2 No 950 M89 Certification Number See label on modem Certification Number See label on modem COMPATIBILITY Leased Line Modulations Paradyne V 32terbo 19200 16800 bps ITU T V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps ITU T V 32 9600 4800 bps Paradyne Trellis Multipoint 19200 14400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps ITU T V 22bis 2400 bps ITU T V 27bis 4800 2400 bps ITU T V 33 14400 12000 bps ITU T V 29 9600 7200 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps Dial Line Modulations Paradyne V 32terbo 19200 16800 bps ITU T V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps ITU T V 32 9600 4800 bps ITU T V 22bis 2400 bps ITU T V 22 1200 bps ITU T V 23 1200 600 bps ITU T V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps Bell 103J 300 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps 1 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Introduction Table 1 1 2 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifications Description ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Shock and Vibration Storage Temperature 32 F 0 C to 122 F 50 C 5 to 90 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping 4 F 20 C to 158 F 70 C DTE INTERFACE 25 pin D subminiature con
286. suee ict ha toleebeschovol riiet edhe Patten oinaren in etc a aa Ea E E a E a ated aod 9 Sub Network Health and Status Branch OVERVIEW seoor iaaa Seca ao ini E e E na E na db ales D 9 1 ii September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Table of Contents 10 Call Setup Branch PADS WEE acct elven funn Nh E Se haus cates ecu wee eles Dial Standby Return to Dial 2 0 ee eee Change Directory airs ewido athe be P45 Pee oe ees Directory Status Does Not Appear in North America 11 Talk Data Branch OVERVIEW ie nih hide ee kale eRe I ee 11 1 Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Auto Answer 0 000 e eee eee eee 11 2 Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual Answer 00 0000 e eee eee 11 3 12 Dial Access Security OVEIVICW eooc spurs TRER EE ee eae deeb eine hs deel es axes Security Branch 6 h che hie dean eke Gee ea eo EEE DS Security Configuration Options 0 0 e eee eee eee Security Password Entry Techniques 005 Database Table Examples 00 cece eee eee eee 13 Remote Branch OVERVIEW ia tian e aia aa bw a a e hoe bia ee wae ene aoe 13 1 14 AT Command Set and S Registers OVERVIEW Merere eraai aeee a wachoeeuibon felt deere Sees Operating Modes 0 0 eee eee eee Command Guidelines AT Command List 0 0 0 0 0 eee S Repister Last aeter eese TEE an ohh sae eid eee eae ee
287. swertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R parameter must be the last character in the dial string For correct operation at least one ringback must be detected therefore the remote modem should be configured to answer on the second ring or subsequent rings 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 14 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 14 2 2 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Dn cont Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends either a NO ANSWER result to the DTE Hook flash This causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Space Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability DS n Dial Stored Number Dials the number stored in Location n 1 24 To Call Setup Dial store a telephone number refer to the amp Zn x command Dial Directory En Command Character Echo Configure Edit E0 Disables echo to the DTE DTE Dialer E1 Enables echo to the DTE Hn
288. synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block If using V 25bis HDLC verify that the character format uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block The modem dials but does not connect If the modem is operating behind a PBX determine if a 9 and comma are needed before the telephone number Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed Verify that both modems are configured the same in regard to Error Control Try calling in Buffer mode If both modems use V 32bis or V 32 modulation try setting the modem s V 32bis Train configuration option to Long Intermittent disconnects high error rates or excessive retransmissions occur Perform an End to End test Refer to Pattern in Chapter 8 Test Branch The modem establishes and then disconnects the call You may have a poor VF connection Try dialing again The remote modem may have encountered an error control EC disconnect If the modems cannot negotiate EC then a disconnect occurs The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode disconnect if there is no error control Reconfigure your modem to V 42 MNP or Buffer and try again Check the LCD to determine the reason for the disconnect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test High error rates occur when running a
289. t the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number is labeled on the equipment The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100 If your equipment is in need of repair refer to the procedure in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section on page 1 5 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 1 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Technical Specifications Table 1 1 shows the technical specifications for the 391x Series modems Table 1 1 1 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifications Description APPROVALS FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 UL Model 3910 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier CSA Model 3910 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier DOC Model 3910 Model 3911 Class A Regi
290. t7 Port8 This configuration option only appears on a control modem when the Extended Main Channel is enabled Upstream Port When an extended control modem s main primary channel is connected to a tributary modem that is one link above it in the diagnostic network this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on the tributary modem DTE amp VF Alarms Allowed End Allowed Prohibited DTE amp VF Alarms Controls the reporting of DTE and VF alarms Allowed DTE and VF alarms are reported whether or not there is a connection m Prohibited DTE and VF alarms are not reported when there is no connection with another modem DTE Dialer The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the DTE to modem protocol for call establishment and control Table 5 2 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 5 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 2 1 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options DTE Dialer Type Disable Nxt Disable AT V25bis_Async V25bis Bsync V25bis HDLC DTR Directit AT amp T_Exclusv Data Termi
291. ta compression It can be set independently of V 42bis data compression Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs The AT command for Disable is CO The AT command for Enable is C1 5 40 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 DCP Configuration Table 5 6 3 of 7 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options EC Negotiat Bfr Disable Nxt Disable Enable Disab amp Switch This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP_or_Buffr or LAPM_or_Bulfr Error Control Negotiate Buffer Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs Disable Data is not buffered during the link negotiating handshaking sequence m Enable Data is buffered while the link is being established Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the handshaking sequence m Disable and Switch Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence However when the modem receives an error control fallback character it switches to Buffer mode Refer to the EC Fallback Char configuration option The AT command for Disable is CO The AT command for Enable is C1 The AT command for Disab amp Switch is C2 EC Fallobck Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013
292. ter syntax error PV parameter value error Table D 1 lists V 25bis commands supported by the 391x Series modems Table D 1 V 25bis Commands V 25bis Command Description Ar a se lent Call Request Commands CRN Call Request with Number Provided ATD CRS Call Request with Memory Address ATDS Call Answer Commands INC Incoming Call Indication RING DIC Disregard Incoming Call NONE CIC Connect Incoming Call ATA Program Command PRN Program Normal AT amp Z List Request RLD Request to List Delayed Numbers NONE RLF Request to List Forbidden Numbers NONE RLN Request to List Stored Numbers NONE List Response LSD List Delayed Numbers NONE LSF List Forbidden Numbers NONE LSN List Stored Numbers NONE D 6 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ITU T V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses Table D 2 lists V 25bis response messages supported by the 391x Series modems Table D 2 V 25bis Response Messages V 25bis Command Description AT Command Result Code Equivalent Call Response CFI Call Failure Indication BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE ERROR CNX Call Connecting Indication CONNECT Command Response VAL Valid Command OK INV Invalid Command ERROR 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank D 8 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 ASCII Character T
293. ters are protected by an Administrative Password which is an 8 digit decimal number Set Access Control contains the Edit Password Table Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password security configuration groups These groups do not appear on the LCD until the correct Administrative Password is entered The Administrative Password is an 8 digit decimal number password that allows only authorized users to access Security branch functionality This password must be entered every time you access the Security branch This feature ships from the factory with the Administrative Password set to 00000000 Once the correct Administrative Password is entered the Edit Password Table Set Answer Security Set Originate Security and Set Administrative Password groups can be displayed on the LCD To enter your Administrative Password from Set_Access_Ctrl make the following selections Security gt A Eee A e Ls amp Select Set_Access_Ctrl from the Security branch Admin Password A lent 100000000 a jle le The Administrative Password appears This occurs every time you enter the Security branch Select the F2 ft key to increment password values Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the full Administrative Password value appears and then select Ent Set Access Ctrl gt A Eee e
294. the amp Zn x command without entering a telephone number An Maximum Frame Size Configure Edit A0 64 bytes V42 MNP Buffer A1 128 bytes A2 192 bytes A3 256 bytes A4 32 bytes A5 16 bytes Cn Error Control Negotiate Buffer Configure Edit co Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable C2 Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode 14 12 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 14 2 9 of 10 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Dn CTS Control Configure Edit DO Forced On Forces CTS to always ON DTE Interface D1 Standard RS232 D2 Wink When Disconnect CTS is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect D3 Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR D4 Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS Gn Modem to Modem Flow Control Configure Edit GO Disable V42 MNP Buffer G1 Enable Kn Buffer Control Send Break Control Break Forces Escape Break Buffer Control Break Buffer Send Break Break Forces RR Control Control Escape KO Discard Data Break First Enable Send Break K1 Discard Data Break First Disable Control 3 K2 Keep Data Break First Enable Configure Edit K3 Keep Data Break First Disable V42 MNP Buffer K4 Keep Data Data First Enable K5 Keep Data Data First Disable Break Forces Escape Configure Edit DTE Dialer Nn Error Control Mode Configure E
295. time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting In both cases 10 sec and 60 sec the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers NOTE This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set to Direct Mode The AT command is S Register S49 n where nis 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments Max Frame Size 256 Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16 This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for BufferMode or DirectMode Maximum Frame Size Sets the maximum frame size for V 42 and MNP For V 42 operation 128 is the maximum value Any value which exceeds this will automatically default to 128 for V 42 For MNP operation 64 is the minimum value Any value less than that will automatically default to 64 For cellular applications at least one of the sides should be set to a low value A setting of 32 is recommended Only one modem needs this setting both modems will automatically default to the greatest common value The AT Command for 256 is A3 The AT Command for 192 is A2 The AT Command for 128 is A1 The AT Command for 64 is AO The AT Command for 32 is A4 The AT Command for 16 is A5 RdcdAsyncBufSiz Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured fo
296. tion of the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option Over a diagnostic channel a tributary modem can communicate with control modems by using the control modem s network management address for polling functions In the poll list modems may be listed as either Active or Skip Modems in the Active poll list are polled by the upstream modem Modems in the Skip poll list are passed over during the polling process but they are not deleted from the poll list Display allows you to view the modem s poll list To access Display from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List A ear Sleat A a Le gt Select Display NOTE If there are no modems in the poll list when you select Display the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD mo List Disp A Nxt XXX yyyyyy A lt Ge Le lL gt 6 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Poll List Branch Clear Change If there are modems in the poll list when you select Display XXX Displays the network management address of the modem in the poll list yyyyyy Displays either Active or Skip to indicate the poll list in which the network management address is included Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Active or Skip poll lists To exit this function and remain in the PList Display branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Lev
297. tions is by selecting Reset Security This restores the password to a known value but erases the contents of the modem s security database To change the Administrative Password make the following selections Set Access Ctrl lt A A A w eJ EJ e Press gt until Set_Admin_PsWd appears Select Set_Admin_PsWd Set Admin PsWd A E 00000000 A LF Le Ls The Administrative Password appears Press the F2 t key to increment password values Press the key to move the cursor to the next position Continue this sequence until the new password value is entered Press the F1 key to save the new password value 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 12 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Reset Security Reset Security is the second major function within the Security branch of the Top Level menu It erases all contents of the security database table and resets all index locations to Cleared Two selections appear under Reset Security Abort Security Reset and Erase All PassWords Use Reset Security if you want to redo the entire security database table CAUTION This function can be used as a last resort if the Administrative Password is no longer known This function causes the Administrative Password to default to the Reset Default password and erases the contents of the database table To Reset Security make the following selections Security
298. tiple download was never initiated MPtCloneResults A Nxt XXX Pass A lt a ro gt The address field xxx displays the network management address of one of the remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 7 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Implementing a Clone Remote Operation WARNING The modem begins a transfer of its own program to the remote modem This process takes the communication link out of service for several minutes depending on the data rate of the link If the Clone Remote process is started and then interrupted the remote modem is left in a partially programmed state in which its functional capabilities are limited to those required to initiate and complete another download attempt Warning Download A eae A jle le At this point if you do not want to continue this process abort the transfer by selecting any function key This returns the modem to the DwnLoadSoftware menu However to continue with the transfer press the m gt key to display the Reprogram_Remote selection Warning Download a Reprogram_Remote A lt F1 F2 F3 Press any function key to begin the transfer RemClone Status A ETT Remote A jj e A R we The local modem s LCD displays Establish Re
299. try 4 Press the F1 ft or F2 key until the slot number you want 1 16 appears on the LCD 2 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Modem Installation 5 Press the Select key to place the SDCP in direct communication with the selected modem The LCD displays the Top Level menu for the selected modem In addition the Front Panel LED on the modem s faceplate and the OK LED on the SDCP light 6 Once you have determined that the modem is installed properly and completed its power up self test rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers the faceplate latch Figure 2 3 and tighten the retention screw on the circuit pack lock This prevents the modem from accidently being removed once it is installed in a carrier 7 Configure the modem as described in Selecting Factory Configuration Options on page 2 6 SDU MODEL 3911 MODEM J CIRCUIT ZX PACK O QO X QY e el i i My LY MRH ee LOCKED OPEN CIRCUIT CARD GUIDES 493 13095a Figure 2 3 Circuit Pack Lock 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 2 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Removing and Replacing Model 3911 Modems CAUTION If the Model 3911 is removed from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3911 in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier It is n
300. ts KKK The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint TMp operation 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 3 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 3 3 2 of 3 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Call Failure Busy Signal The answering modem is busy Delayed As a result of failed call attempts this number cannot be called at Number this time Please try again later Dial Line in Use The modem is operating on dial networks when another call attempt is issued Forbidden Number As a result of failed call attempts this number cannot be called again Invalid Number The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory location Line The line is being used by the associated telephone Occupied No Answer The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified Tone by the No Answer Timeout configuration option The network tones if any could not be interpreted by the modem No Dial DTR The modem cannot dial because DTR is OFF No Dial Test The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test No Dial Tone The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone No Quiet The modem has detected No Quiet Answer before the time out Answer setting of the No Answer Disconnect configuration option Ringback The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified Timeout by th
301. ts the modem waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the DTE Enter a value from 0 255 The factory setting is 0 Table 14 3 2 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence 5 Backspace Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure Edit backspace Backspace key This character moves the cursor to the DTE Dialer left and erases the previous character Enter a value from 0 127 The factory setting is 8 backspace key S6 Blind Dial Pause Register determines how long in seconds the Configure Edit modem waits after going off hook before dialing a telephone number if Line Dialer using result code XO X1 or X3 Enter a value from 2 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 S7 No Answer Time out Register determines how long in seconds an Configure Edit originating modem waits before abandoning a call when no answer Line Dialer tone is received Enter a value from 1 255 seconds The factory setting is 45 S8 Pause Time for the Dial Modifier Register determines how long in Configure Edit seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the Line Dialer Dial command string Enter a value from 0 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 S10 No Carrier Disconnect Register determines how long in tenths of Configure Edit seconds the modem allows the carrier signal to be OFF before Line Dialer disconnecting the call Enter a value from 0 254 in 0
302. tus Dial Thresh Security Port1 VF SigQual RevLevel 2 Sig Noise 2 NrEchLvl1 FarEchLvl FarEchDel EchoFreqOff NonLnearDist2 Retrains 1 These parameters appear for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Identity Ser Mod FRev HPt FPt DTE LSD DTR DSR Tst TXD RXD RTS CTS Backup Options Line Pri 4W APL Line Pri 2W APL Line Bkup 2W APL Line Dial Backup Line Dial ONLY Line No Sync 2 These parameters appear for Trellis Multipoint modulation Record Display Clear 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 4 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Status from the Top Level menu select Status Leased 19 2 a ZS Status ee A lt RALE gt Device Health and Status DeviceHS DeviceHS provides a snapshot of current modem alarms which are active at the time the DeviceHS function is selected To access DeviceHS from the Status branch make the following selection Status a ZN DeviceHS VF A Select DeviceHS Device HS gt A Major Minor A lt a fre gt If alarms are present press the appropriate function key to view the messages associated with these alarms Table 4 1 If needed press the gt key to scroll to additional alarm types If no alarms are present the word Normal appears on the LCD 4 2 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Status Branch Table 4 1
303. vel menu press the A key EIA LEDs Use the EIA LEDs function to change the port that controls the front panel LEDs This function allows the front panel EIA LEDs to display the activity of a selected digital interface To access EIA LEDs from the Control branch make the following selections Control ra aN EIA_LEDs XJ B Olej Press the key until EIA_LEDs appears Select EIA_LEDs EIA_LED xxxxx a EIA lt a A w AJ lel le we Press the F1 key until the appropriate digital interface appears The xxxxx field displays the currently selected interface The valid interfaces are Portl and depending on the configuration option either CC NMS Control Channel or DC Diagnostic Channel Refer to Diag Connection in Table 5 8 Miscellaneous Configuration Options in Chapter 5 DCP Configuration Select the appropriate interface by pressing the corresponding function key EIA_LED xxxxx A Command Complete A cj e e e we 7 4 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Control Branch After selecting the desired interface the message Command Complete appears on the bottom line of the LCD and the selected interface appears in the xxxxx field To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the A key NOTE The Port1 interface is the only display allowed on the 3911 modem therefore the enti
304. vide DTR m Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA 232 D and ITU T V 24 specifications If this signal is not present the modem will not answer or dial m Controls On Hook Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the current session is terminated When selected the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by the attached DTE This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its own front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR drops on the DTE interface This selection can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE If V 25bis mode is used then this configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 The DTE must provide DTR to dial or answer a call NOTE When operating over the dial network this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108 2 Data Terminal Ready If DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to DTR Direct 1 then DTR Action behaves as CT108 1 Connect Data Set to Line NOTE Only the Stndrd_RS222 setting is allowed in Austria The AT command for Ignore is amp DO The AT commands for Standard RS232 are amp D1 or amp D2 The AT command for CntrlsOnHook is amp D4 The AT command for CntrlsTxMute is amp D5
305. y will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 1 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems 7 If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact your sales or service representative as appropriate for repair or warranty information If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com e Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 727 530 2340 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the t
306. ys the status of each directory location To access Directory Status from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup lt A ee ee R trjJlelle we Press the key until Directory_Status appears Press any function key to select Directory_Status Number Status A a 01 Allowed ness W jll wo Select Nxt to display other directory locations The status of a directory location can be No Number The directory location is empty Allowed The number in this directory location may be dialed at this time Delayed The number in this directory location may be dialed later Forbidden The number in this directory location may not be dialed Delayed and Forbidden only appear in certain countries When a number is delayed press the m gt key to display the value of the delay in minutes The delayed and forbidden conditions can be cleared by power cycling the modem This is actually the only way to reenable a forbidden number Deleting a number from a directory location and reentering it into another directory location will not change the delayed or forbidden condition of this number 3910 A2 GN32 40 September 1998 10 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems This page intentionally left blank 10 10 September 1998 3910 A2 GN32 40 Overview Talk Data Branch 1 The Talk Data function is not available in TMp Control mode The Talk Data branch of the Top Level menu

Singer 236W Sewing Machine User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents